Pioneer Avic Hd1 Bt Operation Manual

AVIC HD1 BT - Operation Manual AVIC-HD1BT_UM_EN Free User Guide for Pioneer GPS, Manual - page2

2015-07-27

: Pioneer Pioneer-Avic-Hd1-Bt-Operation-Manual-778556 pioneer-avic-hd1-bt-operation-manual-778556 pioneer pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 192 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

ENGLISH

HDD AV NAVIGATION HEAD UNIT

AVIC-HD1BT

Don't forget to register your

product on www.pioneer.co.uk

(or www.pioneer-eur.com)

Operation Manual

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

The screens shown in the examples may differ from the actual screens.

The actual screens may be changed without notice for performance and function

improvements.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Introduction

Manual Overview

This manual provides the important information you need to make full use of your new navigation sys-

tem. The beginning sections outline the navigation system and describe its basic operation. The later

sections describe the details of the navigation functions.

Chapters 10 to 14 describe how to operate the AV functions. Please read these chapters when you use

a disc in the built-in DVD drive or operate the Pioneer audio equipment connected to the navigation sys-

tem.

How to use this manual

Be sure to read the following descriptions

Licence Agreement (Page 5 to 7)

This provides a licence agreement of this software. Be sure to read this before using the software.

About the Data for the Map Database (Page 7)

This provides the date when the Map Database was recorded.

This provides the copyright of the Map Database.

To find the operation procedure from what you want to do

When you have decided what you want to do, you can find the page you need from the “Table of Con-

tents”.

To find the operation procedure from a menu name

If you want to check the meaning of each item displayed on the screen, you will find the necessary page

from the “Display Information” at the end of the manual.

Glossary

The section at the end of this manual provides a glossary. See the glossary to find the meaning of a

term.

Overview for each chapter

Before Using the System

For safety reasons, it is particularly important that you fully understand your naviga-

tion system before using it. Be sure to read this chapter.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Basic Operation

Please read this section if you want to operate the navigation system immediately.

It will explain the basics of this system.

This section describes the basic operations for navigation.

How to Read Map Display

This section describes how to read the map screen, and the method of changing map view or

map scale.

Modifying Map Configurations

The behaviour of your navigation system depends map display and guidance settings. If you

need to change any of current settings, read the relevant section of this chapter.

Setting a Route to Your Destination

This section describes various ways to search for a destination, to edit the current route con-

ditions, and operate the route during route guidance.

Registering and Editing Locations

You can register and edit the points on the map. This chapter describes how to register a

home location, favourite location, or other location, and how to edit the entry in “Address

Book”.

Using Traffic Information

The system can acquire traffic information and perform navigation using the traffic informa-

tion. This chapter describes ways of viewing traffic icons that are displayed on the map and

operation related traffic information.

Using Hands-free Phoning

When you are using a mobile phone featuring Bluetooth technology by connecting the Blue-

tooth unit to the navigation system, you can operate your mobile phone hands-free. This

chapter describes the operations related hands-free phoning.

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

The behaviour of your navigation system depends on a number of general settings for navi-

gation functions. If you need to change any of the initial settings (default settings), read the

relevant section of this chapter.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

This section describes how to use DVD-Videos, CDs, MP3 discs and the radio.

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

You can record a music CD to the hard disk drive in the navigation system. This chapter

describes recording music and playing back the recorded music.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)

This chapter describes the audio source operation that can be used when Pioneer audio

equipment featuring IP-BUS (Multi-CD player, iPod adapter, TV tuner) is connected.

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

This chapter describes the audio source operation that can be used when an AV equipment

with RCA connector (AV input), future Pioneer devices (external unit), and an auxiliary equip-

ment (AUX) are connected.

Customising the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

Using the audio source, various audio-visual settings are available to suit your tastes. This

chapter describes how to change the settings.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

This section describes navigation operations, such as searching the destination and per-

forming audio operations by voice.

Appendix

Please read the appendix to learn more about your navigation system and information such

as the availability of after-care. Please see “Display Information” at the end of this manual

to check the detail for each item on the menu.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 3 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Terminology

Before moving on, take a few minutes to read the following information about the conventions used in

this manual. They will help you greatly as you learn how to use your new equipment.

• Hardware buttons on your navigation system are described in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:

e.g.)

MAP button, MENU button.

• Items in the different menus or touch keys available on the screen are described in Parenthesis [ ]

and bold:

e.g.)

[Destination], [Settings].

• Extra information, alternative usages, and other notes are presented like this:

e.g.)

❒Touch keys which are not available at this time are greyed out.

• The references have relations with that description are indicated like this:

e.g.)

➲Setting the Route Options ➞ Page 26

The tab on the right corner indicates to which operation the description is related. Nav-

igation operation or AV (Audio Visual) source operation.

For example, “NAVI” indicates that the description is related to the operation for navi-

gation control.

“NAVI/AV” indicates that the description is related to both operation for navigation

control and AV control.

About the definition of terminology

“Front Display” and “Rear Display”

In this manual, the screen that is attached to the body of this navigation unit will be referred to as the

“Front Display”. Any additional optional screen that is purchased for use in conjunction with this navi-

gation unit will be referred to as the “Rear Display”.

“Video image”

“Video image” in this manual indicates the moving image from DVD-Video in the built-in DVD drive or

from the equipment that is connected to this product with AV-BUS or RCA cable, such as a TV tuner or

general-purpose AV equipment.

Colour difference of the map display between day and night

The examples in this manual are illustrated using the daytime display. When driving at night, the col-

ours you see may differ from those shown.

Night display

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 4 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Licence Agreement

PIONEER AVIC-HD1BT

THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU,

AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER CORP.

(JAPAN) (“PIONEER”). PLEASE READ THE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT

CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE

INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY

USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIO-

NEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND

BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE

SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LISENSED

BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER(S) (“SUPPLIERS”),

AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-

ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’ SEPARATE TERMS,

WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT

(Refer to page 7). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH

ALL OF THESE TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE

PIONEER PRODUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFT-

WARE, AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN

FIVE (5) DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS,

TO THE AUTHORISED PIONEER DEALER FROM

WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM.

1. GRANT OF LICENCE

Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non-

exclusive licence to use the software installed on

the Pioneer products (the “Software”) and the

related documentation solely for your own per-

sonal use or for internal use by your business,

only on such Pioneer products.

You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,

port, modify or make derivative works of the Soft-

ware. You shall not loan, rent, disclose, publish,

sell, assign, lease, sublicence, market or other-

wise transfer the Software or use it in any manner

not expressly authorised by this agreement. You

shall not derive or attempt to derive the source

code or structure of all or any portion of the Soft-

ware by reverse engineering, disassembly,

decompilation, or any other means. You shall not

use the Software to operate a service bureau or

for any other use involving the processing of data

for other persons or entities.

Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-

right, trade secret, patent and other proprietary

ownership rights in the Software. The Software is

copyrighted and may not be copied, even if modi-

fied or merged with other products. You shall not

alter or remove any copyright notice or proprie-

tary legend contained in or on the Software.

You may transfer all of your licence rights in the

Software, the related documentation and a copy

of this Licence Agreement to another party, pro-

vided that the party reads and agrees to accept

the terms and conditions of this Licence Agree-

ment.

2. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

The Software and related documentation are pro-

vided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND ITS LICEN-

SOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2 and 3,

Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be collectively

referred to as “Pioneer”) MAKES AND YOU

RECEIVE NO WARRANTY, WHETHER EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MER-

CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTIC-

ULAR PURPOSE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED.

SOME COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION

OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE

EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The Soft-

ware is complex and may contain some non-con-

formities, defects or errors. Pioneer does not

warrant that the Software will meet your needs or

expectations, that operation of the Software will

be error free or uninterrupted, or that all non-con-

formities can or will be corrected. Furthermore,

Pioneer does not make any representations or

warranties regarding the use or results of the use

of the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability

or otherwise.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 5 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

3. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY

YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COM-

PENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES,

LOST PROFITS, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS,

EXPENDITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMIT-

MENTS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS,

LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES)

RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO

USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS

BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD

HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH

DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ALL

CAUSES OF ACTION IN THE AGGREGATE,

INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF

CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLI-

GENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTA-

TION, AND OTHER TORTS. IF PIONEER’S

WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF

LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT

SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE

HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE,

YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S LIABILITY SHALL

NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE

PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIO-

NEER PRODUCT.

Some countries do not allow the exclusion or lim-

itation of incidental or consequential damages,

so the above limitation or exclusion may not

apply to you. This warranty disclaimer and limita-

tion of liability shall not be applicable to the

extent that any provision of this warranty is pro-

hibited by any country or local law which cannot

be preempted.

4. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES

You agree and certify that neither the Software

nor any other technical data received from Pio-

neer, nor the direct product thereof, will be

exported outside the country or district (the

“Country”) governed by the government having

jurisdiction over you (the “Goverment”) except as

authorised and as permitted by the laws and reg-

ulations of the Goverment. If the Software has

been rightfully obtained by you outside of the

Country, you agree that you will not re-export the

Software nor any other technical data received

from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof,

except as permitted by the laws and regulations

of the Goverment and the laws and regulations of

the jurisdiction in which you obtained the Soft-

ware.

5. TERMINATION

This Agreement is effective until terminated. You

may terminate it at any time by destroying the

Software. The Agreement also will terminate if

you do not comply with any terms or conditions of

this Agreement. Upon such termination, you

agree to destroy the Software.

6. MISCELLANEOUS

This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer

and you regarding its subject matter. No change

in this Agreement shall be effective unless

agreed to in writing by Pioneer. If any provision of

this Agreement is declared invalid or unenforcea-

ble, the remaining provisions of this Agreement

shall remain in full force and effect.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 6 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Terms and conditions in relation

to the Tele Atlas navigation data

Object and right of use: This agreement relates to

the digital map data (the ‘data’) included in the

accompanying package. Tele Atlas grants the

BUYER the right to use the data combined with

one (1) car navigation system. The buyer only

becomes the owner of the material data carrier

and does not acquire the ownership of the data.

The buyer is not permitted to fully or partly modify

the data, to combine it with software, to analyse it

by means of reverse-engineering, or to make

products derived from it. The buyer is explicitly

prohibited from downloading the digital maps

and programmes contained in the data or from

transferring these to another data carrier or com-

puter. If the buyer should sell or otherwise part

with the data carrier, he must impose the obliga-

tions contained in this agreement on the receiver.

Unauthorised hiring, lending, public perform-

ance and broadcasting is prohibited.

Guarantee and liability: The use of the data in a

navigation system means that calculation errors

can occur caused by local environmental condi-

tions and/or incomplete data. For the above men-

tioned reasons Tele Atlas can not warrant that

the data operates error-free. To the extent permit-

ted by national laws, Tele Atlas shall not be liable

for any damages arising out of the use of the

data, except for damages caused by gross negli-

gence or intent of Tele Atlas.

tration / © Mapsolutions

voor het kadaster en de openbare registers,

Apeldoorn 2005

This product includes mapping data licenced

from Ordnance Survey with the permission of the

Controller of Her Majesty’s Stationery Office.

About the Data for the Map

Database

• This database was developed and recorded up

to April 2005. Changes to streets/highways

made after that time may not be reflected in

this database.

• It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use

any part or the whole of this map in any form

without permission from the copyright owner.

• If the local traffic regulations or conditions

deviate from this data, follow the local traffic

regulations (such as signs, indications, etc.)

and conditions (such as construction, weather,

etc.).

• The traffic regulation data used in the map

database applies only to standard sized pas-

senger vehicles. Note that regulations for

larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other non-

standard vehicles are not included in the data-

base.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 7 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

This product includes mapping data licenced from Ord-

nance Survey with the permission of the Controller of

Her Majesty’s Stationery Office.

reserved. Licence number 100026920 the Ordnance Sur-

vey Data.

tration, violation of these copyrights shall cause legal

proceedings

kadaster en de openbare registers, Apeldoorn 2006

Company Limited

Company trademarks other than approved in this sec-

tion:

The marks of companies displayed by this product to

indicate business locations are the trade marks of their

respective owners. The use of such marks in this product

in no way implies any sponsorship, approval or endorse-

ment of this product by the owners of such marks.

This database was developed and recorded up to April

2005.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 8 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Table of Contents

Introduction

Manual Overview 1

How to use this manual 1

To find the operation procedure from what you

want to do 1

To find the operation procedure from a menu

name 1

Glossary 1

Overview for each chapter 1

Terminology 4

About the definition of terminology 4

Colour difference of the map display between

day and night 4

Licence Agreement 5

PIONEER AVIC-HD1BT 5

This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer

and you regarding its subject matter. No

change in this Agreement shall be effective

unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. If any

provision of this Agreement is declared

invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provi-

sions of this Agreement shall remain in full

force and effect. 6

Terms and conditions in relation to the Tele At-

las navigation data 7

About the Data for the Map Database 7

Table of Contents 9

Chapter 1

Before Using the System

Important Safety Information 13

Additional Safety Information 14

To ensure safe driving 14

Features (Characteristics of this software) 15

Notes for Hard disk drive 16

Recording equipment and copyright 16

About writing data to the hard disk drive at low

temperature 16

When recording please pay attention to these

points; 16

About the data saved or recorded by the

customer 16

In case of trouble 16

Product registration 16

Chapter 2

Basic Operation

Flow from Startup to Termination 17

How to Use Navigation Menu Screens 18

Displaying Navigation menu 18

Navigation menu overview 18

Basic Navigation 19

How to calculate your destination by using Ad-

dress Search 20

Checking and modifying the route 24

When the route guidance starts 25

Cancelling the Route Guidance 25

Modifying the Route Calculation Conditions 26

Items that users can operate 26

Checking the Current Route 27

Checking the route by text 27

Checking the entire route overview at the

map 27

Editing Waypoints 28

Adding a waypoint 28

Deleting a waypoint 29

Sorting waypoints 29

Skipping a waypoint 29

Chapter 3

How to Read Map Display

How to Use the Map 31

Switching the view mode 31

How to view the map of the current location 31

About “Roads without turn-by-turn

instructions” 35

Changing the scale of the map 36

Scroll the map to the location you want to

see 36

Shortcut menu 37

Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display 38

Chapter 4

Modifying Map Configurations

Entering the Map Menu 39

Setting the Item on the Map Screen 39

Selecting the Shortcut 41

Displaying POI on the Map 41

Browsing the Map Colour Explanation 42

Changing the View Mode for the Navigation

Map 43

Setting the Map Colour Change between Day and

Night 43

Changing the Setting of Navigation Interrupting

Screen 43

Changing the Map Colour 43

Chapter 5

Setting a Route to Your Destination

Searching for Points of Interest (POI) Country

Wide 45

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 9 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Searching a POI from a name of the facilities

directly 45

Searching for POIs by specifying a category

first 46

Searching for POIs by specifying a city name

first 47

Finding a POI in Vicinity 47

Searching for the facilities around the current

position 47

Searching for the facilities around the scroll

cursor 48

Finding Your Destination by Specifying the

Postcode 48

Route Calculation to Your Home Location or to

Your Favourite Location 49

Selecting Destination from the Destination Histo-

ry and Address Book 50

Registering/deleting POI Shortcuts 50

Registering a POI shortcut 50

Deleting a POI shortcut 51

Chapter 6

Registering and Editing Locations

Registering Locations Overview 53

Registering Your Home and Your Favourite

Location 53

Registering location into Address Book 54

Registering location by scroll mode 54

Registering location by Address Book 54

Viewing of the Address Book 55

Editing the entry in “Address Book” 55

Deleting the entry in “Address Book” 58

Destination History Operations 59

Deleting the entry in “Destination History” 59

Chapter 7

Using Traffic Information

Using RDS-TMC Information 61

Viewing traffic list 61

Confirming traffic information on the map 62

Setting alternative route to avoid traffic jam 63

Selecting traffic information to display 64

Selecting preferred RDS-TMC service provider

manually 64

Chapter 8

Using Hands-free Phoning

Hands-free Phoning Overview 67

Preparing communication devices 67

Setting up for hands-free phoning 68

Receiving a phone call 70

Making a phone call 70

Transferring the phone book 73

Registering a phone number in Dial

Favourite 73

Editing the Phone Book data 74

Editing the received call or dialled number

history 75

Chapter 9

Modifying the General Settings for

Navigation Functions

Entering the Settings Menu 77

Setting the Volume Related to the Guidance and

Phone 77

Customising the Regional Settings 77

Changing the language for navigation guidance

and menu 77

Setting the time difference 78

Customising the keyboard layout 78

Changing the unit between km and miles 79

Changing the virtual speed of vehicle 79

Checking the Setting Related with Hardware 79

Checking the connections of leads and installa-

tion positions 79

Checking sensor learning status and driving

status 80

Correcting the installation angle 81

Checking the device and version

information 81

Checking the hard disk information 81

Registering the Home Location and Favourite

Location 82

Changing the Background Picture 82

Using the Demonstration Guidance 84

Correcting the Current Location 84

Restoring the Default Setting 84

Chapter 10

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD

Drive and Radio)

Basic Operation 85

Switching the Audio operation screen 85

Selecting a source 85

About Steering Remote Control 86

How to see the audio operation screen and how

to display the Audio Settings menu 87

Operating the Music CD 88

Selecting [CD] as the source 88

About auto hard disk recording 88

Screen configuration 88

Touch key operation 89

Operating the CD-ROM (MP3 disc) 90

Selecting [ROM] as the source 90

Screen configuration 90

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 10 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Touch key operation 90

Notes on playing MP3 disc 91

Operating the DVD 92

Selecting [DVD] as the source 92

Screen configuration 92

Touch key operation 93

Searching for a desired scene, starting play-

back from a specified time 94

Entering the numerical commands 95

Operating the Radio (FM) 95

Selecting [FM] as the source 95

Screen configuration 95

Touch key operation 96

Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 97

Tuning in strong signals 97

Using radio text 97

Searching for an RDS station by PTY

information 98

Receiving traffic announcements 98

Using news programme interruption 98

Selecting alternative frequencies (AF) 99

Using PI Seek 99

Using Auto PI Seek for preset stations 99

Limiting stations to regional programming 100

PTY list 101

Operating the Radio (AM) 102

Selecting [AM] as the source 102

Screen configuration 102

Touch key operation 102

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies 103

Tuning in strong signals 103

Chapter 11

Using the AV Source (Music Li-

brary)

Music Library Recording 105

Recording all tracks in a CD 106

Recording a CD manually 106

Recording only the first track of a CD 106

Stopping CD recording 106

Notes on CD recording 107

Notes for Hard disk drive 107

Music Library Play 108

Selecting [LIBRARY] as the source 108

Screen configuration 108

Touch key operation 109

Creating a playlist with a customised order 111

Editing a playlist or tracks 112

Assigning another candidate for title

information 116

Chapter 12

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®,

TV)

Operating the Multi-CD Player 119

Selecting [M-CD] as the source 119

Screen configuration 119

Touch key operation 119

Operating the iPod® 121

Selecting [iPod] as the source 121

Screen configuration 121

Touch key operation 121

Browsing for a song 122

Operating the TV tuner 123

Selecting [TV] as the source 123

Screen configuration 123

Touch key operation 123

Storing and recalling broadcast stations 124

Storing the strongest broadcast stations

sequentially 124

Selecting the country group 124

Chapter 13

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT,

AUX)

Operating the AV Input source (AV) 125

Selecting [AV INPUT] as the source 125

Operating the External Unit (EXT) 125

Selecting [EXT 1] or [EXT 2] as the source 125

Screen configuration 125

Touch key operation 125

Operate the external unit by using 1 key – 6

key 126

Operate the external unit by using Function 1 –

Function 4 126

Switching the automatic and manual

function 126

Operating the AUX input source (AUX) 127

Selecting [AUX] as the source 127

Chapter 14

Customising the Audio Setting re-

lated with Audio Visual

AV Setting Overview 129

How to operate the Audio Settings screen 129

Customising the Audio Settings Items 129

Using the equaliser 129

Setting the simulated sound stage 131

Using balance adjustment 131

Using subwoofer output 132

Using non fading output 132

Adjusting loudness 132

Using the high pass filter 132

Adjusting source levels 133

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 11 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Customising the System Settings Items 133

How to view and operate the System

Settings 133

Setting up the built-in DVD drive 134

Changing the wide screen mode 135

Setting for rear view camera 136

Setting the video input 136

Switching the auxiliary setting 137

Switching the muting/attenuation timing 137

Switching the muting/attenuation level 137

Changing the voice output of the navigation

guidance 138

Switching the auto aerial setting 138

Setting the clock display on the video

image 138

Setting the CD recording mode 138

Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller 138

Switching Auto PI seek 139

Setting the FM tuning step 139

Selecting the TV signal 139

Other Functions 139

Selecting the video for “Rear display” 139

Operating the picture adjustment 140

Switching the Backlight On/Off 141

Language Code Chart for DVD 142

Chapter 15

Operating Your Navigation System

with Voice

To Ensure Safe Driving 143

Basics of Voice Operation 143

Flow of voice operation 143

To start voice operation 144

Tips for Voice Operation 145

An Example of Voice Operation 145

Search for POI in vicinity 145

Search for the playlist 146

Using Voice Operation 147

Voice commands related to navigation 147

Voice commands related to AV operation 150

After checking traffic information manually 150

Location screen (A) and (B) 151

Other Voice Commands 152

Other voice commands for navigation

operation 152

Other voice commands for AV operation 154

Category list for vicinity search 155

Appendix

Returning the Navigation System to the Default or

Factory Settings 159

Setting items to be deleted 160

If system errors frequently occur 161

Returning the navigation system completely to

the initial state 161

Adjusting the Response Positions of the Touch

Panels (Touch Panel Calibration) 162

Positioning Technology 163

Positioning by GPS 163

Positioning by dead reckoning 163

How do GPS and dead reckoning work

together? 164

Handling Large Errors 165

When the positioning by GPS is impossible 165

Vehicles that Cannot Obtain Speed Pulse

Data 165

Conditions Likely to Cause Noticeable Positioning

Errors 165

Troubleshooting 168

Problems in the screen 168

Messages and How to React to Them 172

Messages for navigation functions 172

Messages for Audio functions 176

Built-in DVD drive 176

Hard disk drive (Music Library) 176

Other sources 177

When the hard disk drive is disconnected 178

Route Setting Information 178

Route search specifications 178

Route highlighting 179

Tracking 179

Displaying POI 179

Glossary 180

Display Information 183

Navigation menu 183

Shortcut menu 186

Menu in the Audio Screen 187

Audio Settings menu 187

System Settings menu (Page 1) 187

System Settings menu (Page 2) 187

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 12 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 1 Before Using the SystemNAVI/AV

Chapter 1

Before Using the System

Important Safety Information

Before using your navigation system, be sure to

read and fully understand the following safety

information:

• Do not attempt to install or service your

navigation system by yourself. Installation

or servicing of the navigation system by

persons without training and experience in

electronic equipment and automotive

accessories may be dangerous and could

expose you to the risk of electric shock or

other hazards.

• When a route is calculated, the route and

voice guidance for the route is automati-

cally set. Also, for day or time traffic regu-

lations, only information about traffic

regulations at the time when the route was

calculated is shown. One-way streets and

street closures may not be taken into con-

sideration. For example, if a street is open

during the morning only, but you arrive

later, it would be against the traffic regula-

tions so you cannot drive along the set

route. When driving, please follow the

actual traffic signs. Also, the system may

not know some traffic regulations.

❒Read the entire manual before operating this

navigation system.

❒The navigation features of your navigation sys-

tem (and rear view camera option if pur-

chased) are intended solely as an aid to you in

the operation of your vehicle. It is not a substi-

tute for your attentiveness, judgement, and

care when driving.

❒Do not operate this navigation system (or the

rear view camera option if purchased) if doing

so will divert your attention in any way from

the safe operation of your vehicle. Always

observe safe driving rules and follow all exist-

ing traffic regulations. If you experience diffi-

culty in operating the system or reading the

display, park your vehicle in a safe location

and apply the handbrake before making the

necessary adjustments.

❒Never allow others to use the system unless

they have read and understood the operating

instructions.

❒Never use this navigation system to route to

hospitals, police stations, or similar facilities

in an emergency. Stop using any functions

relating to the hands-free phone and please

call the appropriate emergency number.

❒Route and guidance information displayed by

this equipment is for reference purposes only.

It may not accurately reflect the latest permis-

sible routes, road conditions, one way streets,

road closures, or traffic restrictions.

❒Traffic restrictions and advisories currently in

force should always take precedence over

guidance given by the navigation system.

Always obey current traffic restrictions, even if

the navigation system provides contrary

advice.

❒Failure to set correct information about the

local time may result in the navigation system

providing improper routing and guidance

instructions.

❒Never set the volume of your navigation sys-

tem so high that you cannot hear outside traf-

fic and emergency vehicles.

❒To promote safety, certain functions are disa-

bled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or the

handbrake is applied.

❒The data encoded in the hard disk drive for the

navigation system is the intellectual property

of the provider, and the provider is responsible

for such content.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 13 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 1Before Using the System NAVI/AV

❒Keep this manual handy as a reference for

operating procedures and safety information.

❒Pay close attention to all warnings in this

manual and follow the instructions carefully.

❒Do not install this navigation system where it

may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) impair

the performance of any of the vehicle’s operat-

ing systems or safety features, including air

bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the

driver’s ability to safely operate the vehicle.

❒Please remember to wear your seat belt at all

times while operating your vehicle. If you are

ever in an accident, your injuries can be con-

siderably more severe if your seat belt is not

properly buckled.

❒Never use headphones while driving.

Additional Safety Information

To ensure safe driving

Handbrake interlock

Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD video

and certain touch key operation) offered by this

navigation system could be dangerous and/or

unlawful if used while driving. To prevent such

functions from being used while the vehicle is in

motion, there is an interlock system that senses

when the handbrake is set and when the vehicle

is moving. If you attempt to use the functions

described above while driving, they will become

disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and apply the handbrake. Please keep the brake

pedal pushed down before releasing the hand-

brake.

• To avoid the risk of damage and injury and

the potential violation of applicable laws,

the navigation system is not for use with a

“Video image” that is visible to the driver.

• In some countries the viewing of “Video

image” on a display inside a vehicle even

by persons other than the driver may be

illegal. Where such regulations apply, they

must be obeyed.

• When applying the handbrake in order to

view “Video image” or to enable other

functions offered by the navigation sys-

tem, park your vehicle in a safe place, and

keep the brake pedal pushed down before

releasing the handbrake if the vehicle is

parked on a hill or otherwise might move

when releasing the handbrake.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 14 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 1 Before Using the SystemNAVI/AV

• Accuracy/performance of interlock may be

impacted by such factors as GPS signal

detection, speed pulse wire connectivity,

and driving habits or conditions of the

place where the vehicle is parked.

• It is strongly suggested that the speed

pulse wire be connected for accuracy of

navigation and better performance of

interlock.

• If the speed pulse wire is unavailable for

some reason, it is recommended that the

pulse generator ND-PG1 (sold separately)

be used.

When you attempt to watch “Video image” while

driving, the warning “Viewing of front seat

video source while driving is strictly prohib-

ited.” will appear on the screen. To watch “Video

image” on this display, stop the vehicle in a safe

place, and apply the handbrake. Please keep the

brake pedal pushed down before releasing the

handbrake.

About rear view camera and [Rear

View] mode

With an optional rear view camera, you are able

to use the navigation system as an aid to keep an

eye on trailers, or backing into a tight parking

spot.

• SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR

REVERSED.

• USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR

MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA.

OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY

OR DAMAGE.

Features (Characteristics of this

software)

Touch panel key operation

It is possible to operate the navigation function

and the Audio function by using touch panel key.

Variety of View Modes

Various types of screen display can be selected

for navigation guidance.

– [Map Mode], [Mixed Mode], [Street List Mode],

[Driver’s View], and [Twin Map View]

The split screen mode is also available.

– [Rear View] (Rear view camera screen and Nav-

igation map screen)

– [Vehicle Dynamics]

You can also display information on vehicle

speed, acceleration, and voltage, etc.

• The rear view mode is to use the naviga-

tion system as an aid to keep an eye on the

trailers, or while backing up. Do not use

this function for entertainment purposes.

Wide Variety of Facility Information for

Points of Interest (POI) Search

You can search your destination from all areas.

– Approximately 3.4 million POIs are included in

the database.

– Some POI information may not be accurate or

may become inaccurate through the passage of

time. Please directly contact the POI to verify the

accuracy of the information about the POI which

appears in this database. POI information is sub-

ject to change without notice.

Auto Reroute Function

If you deviate from the set route, the system will

re-calculate the route from that point so that you

remain on track to the destination.

❒This function may not work in certain areas.

Auto CD title and MP3 file listing

Title lists will automatically be displayed when a

CD or MP3 disc is played. This system provides

easy-to-operate audio functions that allow play-

back simply by selecting an item from the list.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 15 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 1Before Using the System NAVI/AV

Compatible with the voice recognition

system

Connecting the supplied microphone will enable

voice operation for both the navigation and AV

functions.

Assign an Original Image

You can store your own pictures on a CD-R in

JPEG format and import original images in this

navigation system. These imported images can

be set as a background image, a picture of the

address book and phone book entry.

Station name auto display

While tuning to an RDS station, you can display a

list of the stations you are receiving with the pro-

gramme service names. This facilitates selection

of stations.

If the system cannot receive the programme ser-

vice name, the frequency will be displayed

instead.

Notes for Hard disk drive

Recording equipment and copy-

right

Recording equipment should be used only for

lawful copying and you are advised to check care-

fully what is lawful copying in the country in

which you are making a copy. Copying of copy-

right material such as films or music is unlawful

unless permitted by a legal exception or con-

sented to by the right owners.

About writing data to the hard

disk drive at low temperature

Writing to the hard disk drive such as recording

music to the music library may be disabled when

the navigation system detects abnormally low

temperatures inside the vehicle. Functionality will

become available once the temperature inside

the vehicle returns to normal.

When recording please pay

attention to these points;

• Pioneer does not compensate for the contents

that could not be recorded or any loss of

recorded data due to a malfunction or failure of

the navigation system.

• The data recorded on the navigation system is

not allowed to be used without a permission

from its right holder under copyright law

except for personal entertainment.

• Make sure to check the recording operation

before recording and check the recorded con-

tents after recording.

• Recording is not guaranteed for all CDs.

About the data saved or

recorded by the customer

• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-

tion system by the customer cannot be

extracted from the navigation system, and

those service cannot be accepted.

• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-

tion system by the customer cannot be guaran-

teed during repair or service. Lost data that

was saved or recorded by the customer is not

guaranteed.

• Due to copyrights, the music data recorded

into the Music Library cannot be backed up

during repair or service.

In case of trouble

Should the navigation system fail to operate prop-

erly, contact your dealer or nearest authorised

Pioneer Service Station.

Product registration

Visit us at the following site:

• Register your product. We will keep the details

of your purchase on file to help you refer to this

information in the event of an insurance claim

such as loss or theft.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 16 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

NAVI Chapter 2 Basic Operation

Chapter 2

Basic Operation

Flow from Startup to Termina-

tion

At first, please confirm the positions of the follow-

ing features using the “Hardware Manual”.

•MAP button

•MENU button

•AV button

•OPEN CLOSE button

1Start the engine to boot up the system.

After some time, the navigation opening

screen comes on for a few seconds. Then, a

message screen is displayed.

2Check the details of the caution message

and touch [OK].

You can operate the navigation system by

touching keys displayed on the screen.

The map of your surroundings is displayed.

If the route is already set, the screen changes

to route guidance mode.

When you use the navigation system for the first

time, [Regional Settings] screen appears. On

[Regional Settings] screen, you can change the

language or time. (The settings can also be

changed afterward.)

➲“Customising the Regional Settings” ➞

Page 77

➲How to read the current position screen ➞

Page 31

➲Setting the time ➞ Page 78

❒To protect the LCD screen from damage,

be sure to touch the touch keys with a fin-

ger. (The stylus is supplied for special cali-

brations. Do not use the stylus for normal

operations.)

3Press the MENU button.

Displays the navigation menu.

4Assign a destination by using the touch

panel key and beginning route guidance,

or operate the Audio source.

❒Touch keys which are not available at this

time are greyed out.

➲Specifying the address and searching the

destination ➞ Page 20

➲Searching the destination by map ➞

Page 37

➲Other search methods ➞ Page 45 to 50

➲How to use audio source ➞ Page 85 to 142

5Turn off the vehicle engine to terminate

the system.

This navigation system is also turned off.

❒Until your vehicle reach the vicinity of the

destination, the set route will not be

deleted even if the engine is turned off.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 17 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2Basic Operation NAVI

How to Use Navigation Menu

Screens

The basic operation of the navigation is per-

formed by using menus.

The navigation menu is divided into four:

[Destination], [Info/Phone], [Map], and

[Settings].

Displaying Navigation menu

1Press the MENU button.

2To change to the menu you want to use,

touch the name of the menu displayed at

the top of the screen.

3If you want to return to the map, press the

MENU button.

Navigation menu overview

[Destination] menu

You can search your destination in this menu.

Also you can check your route, and the set route

can be cancelled from this menu.

➲Specifying the address and searching for the

destination ➞ Page 20

➲Other search methods ➞ Page 45 to 50

[Info/Phone] menu

Use this menu to check traffic information or

select the RDS-TMC station.

If you are using the mobile phone featuring Blue-

tooth technology by connecting the Bluetooth

unit (ND-BT1) to the navigation system, you can

configure Bluetooth settings or check the outgo-

ing/incoming call history.

❒[Traffic On Route] and [Traffic List] can be

active only when the navigation system get

available traffic information from a RDS-TMC

station.

➲“Using RDS-TMC Information” ➞ Page 61

❒[Phone Menu] can be active only when the

Bluetooth unit (ND-BT1) is connected to the

navigation system.

[Map] menu

You can change the [View Mode], or set the

items to be displayed during the navigation func-

tion.

❒[View Mode] can be selected only when the

vehicle position is at the current position. If

you want to select [View Mode] while scroll-

ing the map, press the MAP button to locate

the vehicle position back to the current posi-

tion.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 18 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

[Settings] menu

Customise the navigation functions so they can

be used easily.

➲Settings menu ➞ Chapter 9

Buttons you can use

The availability of a specific button or function is

indicated by its look. Depending on the status of

your vehicle, some buttons will be available, while

others will not be.

Active touch key: The button is operable.

Inactive touch key: The function is not available

(e.g., operation is prohibited while driving).

Basic Navigation

• For safety reasons, you cannot use some of

these basic navigation functions while

your vehicle is in motion. To enable these

functions, you must stop in a safe place

and apply the handbrake (see page 14

Interlock for details).

Basic flow of operation

1Park your vehicle in a safe place, and

apply the handbrake.

2Press the MENU button to display the

navigation menu.

3Select the method of searching for your

destination.

4Enter the information about your desti-

nation to calculate route.

5Confirm the location at the map.

6Checking and fixing the route.

7Your navigation system sets the route to

your destination, and the map of your

surroundings appears.

8After releasing the handbrake, drive in

accordance with the navigation informa-

tion, subject to the important safety

instructions noted on page 14 to 15.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 19 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2Basic Operation NAVI

How to calculate your destina-

tion by using Address Search

The most frequently used function is [Address

Search], in which the address is specified and

the destination is searched. This section

describes how to use [Address Search] and the

basics of using the navigation system.

1Press the MENU button to display the

navigation menu.

2Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu.

3Touch [Address Search].

Select the method for searching the destina-

tion.

Touch [Country code key] to select the

country.

If the destination is in another country, this

changes the country setting.

❒Once the country has been selected, you

only have to change countries when your

destination is outside of the country you

selected.

5Input the street name.

When the options are narrowed down to six or

less, a list of the matched streets automati-

cally appears.

When you enter the same characters as those

entered previously, the system automatically

displays the character that follows the entered

characters. (Auto fill-in function.)

❒When entering the characters, the system

will automatically search the database of

all possible options. If there is only one let-

ter that could possibly follow your entry,

that letter will automatically be entered.

❒A list appears if multiple options exist,

select the desired one from the list, and

proceed to the next step. In rare cases, you

need to input the city name to determine

the city.

Country code key

Operation of country selection screen

(1) [ABC] to [WXYZ]:

Use to jump to the first country with that

alphabet.

(2) :

Use to see the next page or previous page of

the list.

(3) Country list:

Pressing one of these items, set that as

search area.

(4) [Back]:

Returns previous screen.

(1)

(3) (4)(2)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 20 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

Operation of street name or city name

input screen (e.g. QWERTY keyboard)

(1) Country code key:

Jump to the country selection screen.

(Selected country code is displayed.)

(2) [OK]:

Confirms the characters displayed in (4), and

proceeds to the next step.

(3) [List]:

Lists candidates based on yellow characters

in (4). Touch the desired item in the list to pro-

ceed to the next step.

(4) Text box:

Displays the characters that are entered.

(5) Keyboard:

Use to enter the text.

(6) [Back]:

Returns previous screen.

(7) :

The input text is deleted one letter at a time

from the end of the text. Continuing to touch

deletes all of the text.

(8) [City]:

Touch if you want to specify the destination

city or area first. (This is available only when

(4) is blank.)

(9) [Others]:

You can enter other characters of alphabet.

For example, when you use any of “A”, “Ä”,

“Å”, “Æ”, the result to come out is the same.

(10) [Sym.]:

You can input text with marks such as [&] or

[+].

(11) [0-9]:

You can input text with numbers.

(4) (7)

(12)

(11) (10) (1) (3) (6)

(2)

(5)

(9)

(13)

(8)

(12) [Street]:

Touch if you want to return the street input

mode. (This is available only when (8) is

blank.)

(13) [Centre]:

This can be selected when you enter a city or

area name first. Touch this button to display

the central point of the entered city or area.

Touching [OK] searches the route to the cen-

tral point. Proceed to Step 9.

❒You can customise the keyboard type to be

displayed on the screen.

➲“Customising the keyboard layout” ➞

Page 78

Auto fill-in function

The previously entered characters are stored

for each country and each search function.

The next time a character is entered, sug-

gested character will be shown. For example,

if [HOLLYBUSH HILL] has been entered in the

past, when you input a letter just [H], [HOLLY-

BUSH HILL] will be fill-in automatically. The

manually input characters are displayed in

yellow, and the suggested characters are dis-

played in white, so you can distinguish them.

To determine the filled-in character, touch

[OK].

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 21 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2Basic Operation NAVI

6Touch the street from the list.

If the selected street has only one matching

location, the destination display screen

appears. Proceed to Step 9.

7Touch the city or area where your destina-

tion is located.

8Input the house number and touch [OK].

Touch the characters you want to input.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲“Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 24

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲“To check the location at the map” ➞

Page 23

❒Touching [OK] with no input, the central

point of the house number range is dis-

played and “Location confirmation screen”

appears.

Route calculation starts.

When the route calculation is completed,

“Route Confirmation screen” appears.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 22 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

Operation of street list screen

(1) Number of possible choices

(2) :

Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls you

through the list and allows you to view the

remaining items.

(3) :

If the character that cannot be displayed

within the displayed area, touching to the

right of the item allows you to see remained

characters.

(4) :

Touching displays a map of the place you

have selected. (Possibilities for place names

may appear with the list screen.) You can also

set a destination by touching to the right

of the list. Touching [OK] set the location

pointed by the scroll cursor as your destina-

tion.

(5) [Back]:

Returns previous screen.

(2)

(4) (1)

(5)

To check the location at the map

“Location confirmation screen”

(1)

Calculating the route to the destination

Route calculation starts. When the route cal-

culation is completed, “Route Confirmation

screen” appears.

❒If you press the MAP button or MENU

button during route calculation, the calcu-

lation is cancelled and the map screen

appears.

(2)

Scrolling the map

The map display changes to the scroll mode.

The scroll mode can fine-adjust the location,

and then you can set the location as your des-

tination or do various operation by using the

shortcut menu.

➲“Shortcut menu” ➞ Page 37

(3)

Setting the location as waypoint

The location indicated by the scroll cursor will

be set as a waypoint.

➲“Editing Waypoints” ➞ Page 28

(1)

(2)

(3)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 23 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2Basic Operation NAVI

9Touch [OK] to decide your route.

Checking and modifying the

route

You can check the route details. You can also

recalculate the route in different conditions.

Route Confirmation screen

(1) Route calculation condition

Shows the route has been calculated under those

conditions.

• shows that fast route is prioritised.

• shows that short route is prioritised.

• shows that using the highway and main

road is prioritised.

• shows whether the suggested route

include the motorway or not.

• shows whether the suggested route

include the toll road or not.

• shows whether the suggested route

include the ferry or not.

• shows whether the suggested route

include the learning route or not.

In addition, if the calculated route have unin-

tended results, the following icons will be shown.

• shows that the motorways could not be

avoided.

• shows that the toll road could not be

avoided when the setting [Avoid Toll Road] is

[On].

• shows that the ferry route could not be

avoided when the setting [Avoid Ferry] is

[On].

(2) Distance to the destination

(3) Travel time to destination

(4) Sets the displayed route

Sets the displayed route as your route, and starts

the route guidance.

➲When the route guidance starts ➞ Page 25

(5) Displaying multiple routes

You can select a desired route from multiple

route options. Calculated routes are shown in dif-

ferent colours.

Touching to switch to another

route. Touching [OK] returns to the previous dis-

play.

If you set waypoints, you cannot use the multiple

route option.

❒There can be cases that the same route is dis-

played even when multiple routes are

searched.

❒In multiple route calculations, both routes

that use and avoid the motorways are calcu-

lated independently of the setting of [Avoid

Motorway].

(6) Changing the route calculation condition

Modify each calculation condition, and recalcu-

late the route.

➲Refer to after Step 3 of “Modifying the Route

Calculation Conditions” ➞ Page 26

(7) View the route profile

You can check the streets which you will go

through the destination.

➲Refer to after Step 3 of “Checking the route by

text” ➞ Page 27

(8) Checking the shape of route

You can check overall shape of your route and the

location of destination on the map.

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(3) (2) (1)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 24 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

➲Refer to after the Step 2 of “Checking the

entire route overview at the map” ➞ Page 28

(9) Adding and editing the waypoint

You can add/remove or sort waypoints.

➲“Editing Waypoints” ➞ Page 28

When the route guidance starts

Touching [OK] in “Route Confirmation screen”

starts the route guidance on the displayed route.

Your navigation system gives you the following

information with the timing adjusted to the speed

of your vehicle:

• Distance to the next turning point

• Direction of travel

• Road number of the motorway

• Arrival of waypoint (If waypoints are set)

• Arrival of your destination

❒

Touching

allows you to turn the

voice guidance on or off.

❒Touching allows you to hear the

information again.

❒If you stop at a petrol station or a restaurant

during the route guidance, your navigation

system remembers your destination and route

Information. When you start the engine and

get back on the road, the route guidance

resumes.

❒If you deviate from the route with guidance set

to [Street List Mode] or [Mixed Mode] and

enter a street not recorded on the hard disk

drive, the screen changes to [Map Mode].

When you return to the route, returns to the

original view and resumes route guidance.

Basic items on the guidance

This section describes only the basic items that

are displayed on the Map Mode screen.

➲Details of the map screen ➞ Page 31

(1) Current location

(2) Distance to the destination

(3) Estimated time of arrival (default)

(4) ON/OFF key of voice guidance

Cancelling the Route Guidance

If you no longer need to travel to your destination

or if you want to change your destination, follow

the steps below to cancel the route guidance.

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Cancel Route].

The message confirming whether to cancel

the current route appears.

2Touch [Yes].

The current route is deleted, and a map of

your surroundings reappears.

On this screen, you can also select the follow-

ing items:

Skip:

Skip the route to the selected waypoint, and

the route is recalculated. (The skipped way-

point will not be deleted.)

No:

Returns to the previous display without delet-

ing the route.

(1)(3)(2) (4)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 25 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2Basic Operation NAVI

Modifying the Route Calculation

Conditions

You can modify the conditions for route calcula-

tion and recalculate the current route.

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

❒[Route Overview] is displayed only when

the route is set.

2Touch [Options].

3Touch the desired items to change the

route calculation conditions and then

touch [OK].

The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-

mation screen” appears.

When a single route is calculated, the system

searches the route that meets these condi-

tions as much as possible.

❒A single route is calculated in the following

cases:

– When a waypoint is set

– When a route is set through voice recogni-

tion

– When auto reroute is carried out

Items that users can operate

Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that

they are default or factory settings.

Route Condition

This setting controls which the route should be

calculated by taking into account the time or the

distance or the main road.

Determine which condition takes priority for

route calculation.

[Fast]*:

Calculate a route with the shortest travel time to

your destination as a priority.

[Short]:

Calculate a route with the shortest distance to

your destination as a priority.

[Main Road]:

Calculate a route that passes major arterial road

as a priority.

Avoid Toll Road

This setting controls whether toll roads (including

toll areas) should be taken into account.

[Off]*:

Calculate a route that may include toll roads

(including toll areas).

[On]:

Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (including

toll areas).

❒The system may calculate a route that

includes toll road even if [On] is selected.

Avoid Ferry

This setting controls whether ferry crossings

should be taken into account.

[Off]*:

Calculate a route that may include ferries.

[On]:

Calculate a route that avoids ferries.

❒The system may calculate a route that

includes ferryway even if [On] is selected.

Avoid Motorway

This setting controls whether motorways may be

included in the route calculation.

[Off]*:

Calculate a route that may include motorways.

[On]:

Calculate a route that avoids motorways.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 26 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

❒The system may calculate a route that

includes motorway even if [On] is selected.

Learning Route

The system learns the travel history of your vehi-

cle for each road.

This setting controls whether or not the travel his-

tory should be taken into account.

[On]*:

Calculate the route with the travel history taken

into account.

[Off]:

Calculate the route without the travel history

taken into account.

[Clear]:

Clear the current travel history.

Checking the Current Route

You can check information about the route

between your current location and your destina-

tion.

You can select two methods:

• Checking the passing streets with a list.

• Checking the route by scrolling the map along

the route.

Checking the route by text

You can check the route details.

❒This function is not available if your vehicle

has deviated from the route.

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

Route confirmation screen appears.

❒[Route Overview] is displayed only when

the route is set.

2Touch [Profile].

3Touch or to scroll the list.

Scroll the list as necessary.

4Touch [Back].

You can return to the previous display.

❒When a long distance route is calculated,

your navigation system may not be able to

list all roads. (In this case, the remaining

roads will be shown in the list as you drive

on.)

Checking the entire route over-

view at the map

You can check the entire shape of the current route.

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

Route confirmation screen appears.

❒[Route Overview] is displayed only when

the route is set.

2Touch [Detail].

Names of the streets you are driving through

Driving distance

Turning direction

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 27 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2Basic Operation NAVI

3Touch the screen and place the scroll cur-

sor on the point whose detail or entire pic-

ture you want to view. Or zoom in or zoom

out the map scale.

The map around the scroll cursor is zoomed in

or out so you can view the detail or the entire

picture.

4Touch [Back].

You can return to the previous display.

❒You can also check the overview by using

the shortcut menu if [Whole Route Over-

view] is selected on the [Short-Cut

Selection].

Editing Waypoints

You can select waypoints (locations you want to

visit on the way to your destination) and you can

recalculate the route to pass through these loca-

tions.

Adding a waypoint

Up to 5 waypoints can be selected, and selected

points can be sorted automatically or manually.

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

2Touch [Waypoints].

The waypoint menu screen appears.

3Touch [Add].

Switch the display to search for points. After

searching for a point, display it on a map, then

touch [OK] to add to the waypoints. (You can

add up to five waypoints in total.)

4Touch [OK].

A route is recalculated, and “Route confirma-

tion screen” appears.

➲“Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 24

❒If you set a waypoint(s) in the route to your

destination, the route up to the next way-

point will appear light green. The rest of

the route will be light in blue.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 28 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2 Basic OperationNAVI

Deleting a waypoint

You can delete waypoints from the route and then

recalculate the route. (You can delete waypoints

successively.)

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

2Touch [Waypoints].

The waypoint menu screen appears.

3Touch [Delete], then touch the waypoint

you want to delete.

The touched waypoint will be deleted from the

list.

4Touch [OK].

The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-

mation screen” appears.

➲“Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 24

Sorting waypoints

You can sort waypoints, and recalculate the

route.

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

2Touch [Waypoints].

The waypoint menu screen appears.

3Touch [Sort], then touch [Automatic] or

[Manual].

Automatic:

You can sort the destination and waypoints

automatically. The system will show the near-

est waypoint (distance in a straight line) from

the current location as waypoint 1, and sort

the other points (including your destination)

in order of distance from your current loca-

tion.

Manual:

You can manually sort destination and way-

points. Touch the destination and waypoints

on the left side of the screen in the order you

want to visit. The touched destination and

waypoints are displayed on the right side of

the screen. Touch [OK] to complete the sort-

ing, and the previous screen appears.

4Touch [OK].

The route is calculated again, and “Route con-

firmation screen” appears.

➲“Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 24

Skipping a waypoint

If the points are set, the next waypoint along the

route can be skipped.

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Cancel Route].

2Touch [Skip].

A new route to your destination through all

remaining waypoints, except for the skipped

waypoint, is calculated.

“Route confirmation screen” appears.

➲“Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 24

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 29 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 2Basic Operation NAVI

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 30 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

NAVI Chapter 3 How to Read Map Display

Chapter 3

How to Read Map Display

How to Use the Map

Most of the information provided by your naviga-

tion system can be seen on the map. You need to

get to know how the information appears on the

map.

Switching the view mode

There are five types of map display and two addi-

tional view modes.

•Map Mode

•Driver’s View

•Twin Map View

•Mixed Mode (during route guidance only)

•Street List Mode (during route guidance

only)

•Vehicle Dynamics

•Rear View (Only possible when the [Camera

Input] is set to [On].)

1Press the MAP button to display a map of

the area around your current position.

2Press the MAP button again.

3Touch the mode name to select the mode

you want to display.

❒You can display the view mode screen by

touching [Map] in the navigation menu,

and touching [View Mode].

How to view the map of the cur-

rent location

❒This example shows the case where [Second

Maneuver Arrow] is set to [View].

Map Mode

Displays standard map.

Driver’s View

The map from the driver’s viewpoint is shown.

About the 3D POI

Depending on the data, the POI may appear in

graphical 3D or plate format with POI mark in the

left screen of [Driver’s View].

❒The displayed POI in the left screen has no

relation with the setting of [Overlay POI].

(1)

(4)

(16)

(3)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11) (6)

(12) (21) (7)

(5)

(9)

(8)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(15)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11) (6)

(21)

(7)

(22)

(8)

(5)

(9)

(13)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 31 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 3How to Read Map Display NAVI

Twin Map View

You can split the screen vertically in half. The

right screen and the left screen can display a

map in different scales. If you set [Twin View

2D/3D] to [3D], a 3D map appears on the left

screen.

➲Twin View 2D/3D ➞ Page 39

Mixed Mode

The standard map of your surroundings is over-

laid with the name of the street you will turn onto

next, and 2 arrows: the larger one on the left indi-

cating the direction of your next maneuver and

how far you are from approaching it, and the

smaller one on the right indicating the direction

of your second to next maneuver and how far you

are from approaching it.

Street List Mode

Displays the name of the street you will next

travel along and an arrow indicating the direction

of travel.

Vehicle Dynamics Display

Indicates the status of your vehicle.

• In the Vehicle Dynamics Display mode,

the speedometer display may show a dif-

ferent speed than your vehicle’s actual

speedometer, because your unit measures

speed in a different way.

❒You can change the items indicated on the left

and right meters.

➲Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display ➞

Page 38

Rear View

Rear view image is displayed on the left-hand

side of the screen, while the map of your sur-

roundings is indicated on the right.

❒If the [Camera Input] is set to [Off], the rear

view image is not displayed. Please set it to

[On].

➲Camera setting ➞ Page 136

❒When using a camera set to turn On/Off in

conjunction with the reverse signal, no cam-

era images will be displayed in rear view mode

while you are moving forward.

❒If the camera is set always On, it can display

images in rear view mode when the vehicle is

moving forward. In that case, you should ask

the camera maker or dealer whether the cam-

era’s functions or lifetime would be affected.

(1)

(4)

(3)

(15)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11) (6)

(21)

(7)

(6)

(8)

(5)

(9)

(7)

(22) (13)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(15)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11)

(7)

(6)

(12)(21)

(16)

(22)

(8)

(5)

(9)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(15)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11) (6)

(21)

(7)

(8)

(5)

(9)

(13)

(22)

(2) (10) (20)

(15)

(21)

(9)

(13)

(7)

(5)

(6)

(8)

(22)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 32 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 3 How to Read Map DisplayNAVI

❒Rear View can be displayed at all times (e.g.

when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a

split screen where map information is partially

displayed. Please beware that in this setting,

camera image is not resized to fit to screen,

and that a portion of camera image may not

be viewable.

Enlarged map of the intersection

This screen is displayed only when [Close Up

View] in the [Map] menu is [2D] or [3D].

Display during motorway driving

In certain locations of the motorway, lane infor-

mation is available, indicating the recommended

lane to be in to easily maneuver the next guid-

ance.

While driving on the motorway, motorway exit

numbers and motorway signs may be displayed

when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits.

❒If the data for these items are not contained in

the hard disk drive, the information is not

available even if there are the signboards on

the actual road.

City Map

When [City Map] in the [Map] menu is [On], in

certain metropolitan city areas, a more detailed

[City Map] is available at the 50m (0.05 mi) map

scale or lower. (The screen changes automati-

cally when you enter certain metropolitan city

area.)

❒The detailed city map may not appear for the

following reasons:

• The data for that city area is not contained

in the hard disk drive.

• When you are driving on a motorway.

(13)

(14)

Enlarged map of the intersection (2D)

(23)

Enlarged map of the intersection (3D)

(17)

(18) (19)

(24)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(10) (20)

(2)

(11)

(21) (7)

(6)

(8)

(5)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 33 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 3How to Read Map Display NAVI

Display items

❒Information with the mark (*) appears only

when the route is set.

❒Depending on the conditions and settings,

some items may not be displayed.

Current location

The current location of your vehicle. The tip of the

triangular mark indicates your heading and the

display moves automatically as you drive.

❒The head of the triangular mark is the current

vehicle position.

Destination*

The checker-flag indicates your destination.

Guidance point*

The next guidance point (next turning point, etc.)

is shown by a yellow flag.

The guidance points of up to three point ahead

including the waypoint are displayed.

waypoint

The checker-flag and number (1 to 5) indicates

your waypoint.

(1) Name of the street to be used (or next

guidance point)*

(2) Distance to the guidance point*

Touching allows you to hear the infor-

mation again.

(3) Distance to the destination (or distance to

waypoint)*

The distance on this button shows the distance to

the destination or to each waypoint. If waypoints

are set, the distance to the destination and the

next waypoint change with each touch.

❒When the vehicle position is on the route, the

distance to the destination (or waypoint)

appears. When the vehicle position is not on

the route, the linear distance to the destina-

tion (or waypoint) appears.

(4) Name of the street your vehicle is travel-

ling along (or City Name, etc.)

(5) Compass

The red arrow indicates north. If the scale is less

than 50 km (25 mi), touching the map changes

the direction that it is displayed in (north up/

heading up). When the scale of the map is

greater than 50 km (25 mi), it is fixed to “north

up”.

Heading up:

The map display always shows the vehicle’s

direction as proceeding toward the top of the

screen.

North up:

The map display always has north at the top of

the screen.

(6) Zoom in/Zoom out

Touch to change the map’s scale.

➲Changing the map’s scale ➞ Page 35

(7) Map scale

The scale of the map is indicated by distance.

(8) VOICE icon

Touch to change to the voice recognition mode.

❒This is displayed only when the microphone

for voice recognition is connected.

➲The voice operation of the navigation system

➞ Chapter 15

(9) RDS-TMC service provider

This appears when RDS-TMC signal is received.

The service provider name of RDS-TMC currently

received is shown.

❒The station name or frequency will be shown

when the service provider name is not avail-

able.

(10) Current time

(11) Estimated time of arrival (or travel time

to your destination)*

The display alternates by pressing it.

❒The estimated time of arrival is an ideal value

calculated based on the value set for

[Average Speed] and the actual driving

speed. The estimated time of arrival is only a

reference value, and does not guarantee

arrival at that time.

➲How to set average speed ➞ Page 79

(12) Tracking dot

The tracking dot shows the route your vehicle has

travelled by white dots.

➲Select the tracking setting ➞ Page 39

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 34 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 3 How to Read Map DisplayNAVI

(13) Map of your surroundings (Side map)

Touching on the map briefly shows the shortcut

menu, while touching longer changes the map to

the Scroll mode.

➲Moving the map to the location you want to

see ➞ Page 36

(14) Distance to a turning point*

Displayed on the enlarged intersection map. The

green bar gets shorter as your vehicle

approaches a turning point.

(15) Next direction of travel*

When you approach an intersection, it appears

green. The screen displays the distance to the

next guidance point.

(16) Direction line*

The direction towards the location set in (4) is

indicated with a straight line.

(17) Lane information*

Lane information is displayed the first time there

is a voice guidance on your route. The indications

with white arrow on the green plate is the most

recommended lane. If the next travelling direc-

tion screen is displayed when you approach a

interchange, junction or exit, the lane information

disappears.

(18) Motorway signs*

These show the road number and give directional

information.

(19) Motorway exit information*

Displays the motorway exit.

(20) Bluetooth Connected icon

This icon shows whether the mobile phone fea-

turing Bluetooth technology is connected or not.

You can select between display and non-display.

: Connected

: Disconnected

❒This is available only when the Bluetooth unit

is connected.

➲Selecting display or non-display for the

Bluetooth Connected icon ➞ Page 40

(21) Mute Voice Guidance icon

Touch to turn on or off the mute setting of Voice

Guidance. You can select between display and

non-display.

➲Selecting display or non-display for the Mute

Voice Guidance icon ➞ Page 40

(22) Second Maneuver Arrow*

The turning direction two corners ahead appears.

You can select between display and non-display.

➲Selecting display or non-display for the

Second Maneuver Arrow ➞ Page 40

(23) POI icon

The POI icon may appear on the enlarged map of

the intersection (when available data exists.).

(24) Suggested lane information*

The travelling direction screen is displayed when

you approach a interchange, junction or exit. The

suggested lane is indicated with green arrow.

About “Roads without turn-by-

turn instructions”

Routable roads (The route displayed and high-

lighted in purple colour) have only basic data and

can only be used to plot a navigable route. Pio-

neer Navigation will only display a navigable

route on the map (only the arrival guidance for

the destination or a waypoint is available). Please

review and obey all local traffic rules along the

highlighted route. (For your safety.)

No turn-by-turn directions will be displayed on

these roads.

When your vehicle reaches to the entrance of this

road, the icon will be displayed beside the

direction arrow, indicating that the guidance is

not available with this type of road. The icon

will be indicated for the road with which the guid-

ance is available.

The Close-up of intersection function, Auto

Reroute function, Changing the view to [Mixed

Mode], or [Street List Mode] are not available.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 35 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 3How to Read Map Display NAVI

Changing the scale of the map

Touching or allows you to change the map

scale. Touch and holding or allows you to

change the scale in smaller step within a range of

25 meters to 500 kilometres (25 yards to 250

miles). When the view mode is set to Map Mode

or Mixed Mode, “Direct scale key” is displayed.

Touching “Direct scale key” changes the map to

the selected scale directly.

❒The icon of the entry in “Address Book” and

the traffic information icon are displayed

when the map scale is 20 km (10 miles) or

lower.

❒Traffic line is displayed when the map scale is

5 km (2.5 mile) or lower.

❒POI icons are displayed when the map scale is

1 km (0.75 mile) or lower.

Scroll the map to the location

you want to see

Touching anywhere on the map changes the map

to “Scroll mode” and the map begins scrolling in

the direction you touched. The scrolling stops

when you release your finger from the screen.

Pressing the MAP button returns you to the map

of your surroundings.

This is the line connecting between the current

location and scroll cursor.

❒Touch the area close to the centre of the

screen to scroll slowly; touch near the sides of

the screen to scroll through quickly.

❒During [Twin Map View], the map on the left

hand side cannot be scrolled. Touch the map

on the right hand side to scroll the maps.

(1) Scroll cursor

The position of scroll cursor shows the location

selected on the current map.

❒When the scale is 200 m (0.25 mi) or lower,

the road appears light blue in the vicinity of

the scroll cursor.

(2) Direction line

This is the line connecting between the current

location and scroll cursor.

The direction towards the scroll cursor is indi-

cated with a straight line.

(3) Distance from the current location

This shows the distance in a straight line

between the location indicated by the scroll cur-

sor and your current location.

(4) The street name, city name, area name

and other information for this location.

(The information displayed varies according to

the scale.)

Touching on the right displays hidden text.

(5) Current location key

Touching returns you to the map of your cur-

rent location.

Viewing the information of a specified

location

An icon appears at registered places (home loca-

tion, specific places, address book entries) and

places where there is a POI icon or traffic infor-

mation icon. Place the scroll cursor over the icon

to view the detailed information.

Direct scale key

(4)

(1)

(3) (2) (5)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 36 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 3 How to Read Map DisplayNAVI

1Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor

to the icon you want to view.

2Touch .

Information for a specified location appears.

The information shown varies according to

the location. (There may be no information for

that location.)

➲Registering places ➞ Page 53

➲Displaying facilities (POI) icon on the map

➞ Page 41

➲Icons for traffic information ➞ Page 62

❒ appears when the Bluetooth unit is

connected to the navigation system

together with the mobile phone. By touch-

ing , you can make a phone call to

the displayed phone number.

➲“Dialling from the map” ➞ Page 72

3Touch [Back].

You can return to the previous display.

4Touch .

You can return to the map of your surround-

ings.

❒You can also return to the map of your sur-

roundings by pressing the MAP button.

Shortcut menu

Shortcuts allow you to perform various tasks,

such as route calculation for the location indi-

cated by the scroll cursor, or registering a loca-

tion in [Address Book], faster than using the

navigation menu.

You can customise the shortcuts displayed on

screen. The shortcuts described here are pre-

pared as default setting.

➲Changing a shortcut ➞ Page 41

❒When the Bluetooth unit is connected to the

navigation system, you can use shortcuts

related to phone functions.

❒Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be

removed from the shortcut menu.

1When the map is displayed, touch .

: Route Options*

Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This

item can be selected only during route guid-

ance.

You can modify the conditions for route calcu-

lation and recalculate the current route.

➲“Modifying the Route Calculation Condi-

tions” ➞ Page 26

: Destination*

Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the

route to the place specified with the scroll cur-

sor.

: Registration

the location indicated by the scroll cursor.

➲Register to Address Book ➞ Page 54

: Vicinity Search

Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of

the scroll cursor.

➲“Finding a POI in Vicinity” ➞ Page 47

Shortcut menu

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 37 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 3How to Read Map Display NAVI

: Overlay POI

Displays icon for surrounding facilities (POI)

on the map.

➲“Displaying POI on the Map” ➞ Page 41

: Volume

Display [Volume Setting].

➲Volume ➞ Page 77

: Phone Book

Displays [Phone Book].

➲“Calling a number in the Phone Book” ➞

Page 71

➲“Editing the Phone Book data” ➞ Page 74

: Menu Close

Hides the shortcut menu.

Setting the Vehicle Dynamics

Display

You can change the content of meter on the left

and right of the Vehicle Dynamics Display.

Until the sensor’s initial learning is complete,

only the voltage and clock are available.

❒The speed displayed is a guideline and may

not correspond to the actual speed.

1Switch to the Vehicle Dynamics Display.

➲Changing the map display mode ➞

Page 31

2Touch the left or right meter.

Touch keys are displayed.

3Touch the items you want to display.

You can select the following items.

Voltage:

Displays the power supply and voltage sup-

plied from the battery to this system.

Acceleration:

Acceleration in a forward direction is dis-

played. The + sign indicates acceleration

while the – sign indicates deceleration.

Lateral Acceleration:

Acceleration in a side direction such as when

turning, is displayed. The + sign indicates a

right turn, while the – sign indicates a left

turn.

Angular Velocity:

Displays the vehicle’s turning angle over one

second (how far it has turned in a second).

Slope:

Displays the vehicle’s vertical movement. The

+ side represents the rising angle, and the –

side the falling angle.

Direction:

The direction your vehicle is travelling in is dis-

played.

Clock:

Current time is displayed.

Adjust Style:

Touch [Adjust Style] to display a screen for

selecting the panel pattern. Touch one of the

patterns from among those displayed on

screen to change the panel to the selected pat-

tern.

❒If you touch [Peak Hold Reset], the maxi-

mum and minimum (green line) values

indicated in [Acceleration] and [Lateral

Acceleration] are reset.

❒You cannot change the speedometer at the

centre.

❒Selecting Demo Mode in the Settings

menu enables you to perform a demon-

stration with random values.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 38 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 4 Modifying Map ConfigurationsNAVI

Chapter 4

Modifying Map Configurations

• For safety reasons, these functions are not

available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop

in a safe place and put on the handbrake

before setting your route (see page 14

Interlock for details).

Entering the Map Menu

1Press the MENU button to display the

navigation menu.

2Touch [Map] to display the Map menu.

3Change the setting.

➲Adjusting each item ➞ Page 39 to 43

❒This section describes the details of the

setting for each item. Settings marked with

an asterisk (*) show that they are default or

factory settings.

Setting the Item on the Map

Screen

You can select whether to display or hide the icon

on the map or how to display the map.

1Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then

touch [Displayed Info].

The Displayed Info screen appears.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

2To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Close Up View

You can select the method to display the close

up view of the intersection.

2D*:

Displays the close up view with the 2D map.

3D:

Displays the close up view with [Driver’s

View].

Off:

Do not display the close up view.

City Map

You can select whether to display or not the

city map when in certain metropolitan city

areas.

On*:

Automatically switches to the city map when

in a city map area.

Off:

Do not show the city map.

❒Even if you switch [City Map] to [On], city

map cannot display in the area where

there is no city map data.

Tracking Display

You can display the trace of your passing with

white dots on the route.

On (Always):

Display tracking for all journeys.

On (This journey):

Display tracking dots but erase them when

the navigation system is turned off (when

turning off the engine of your vehicle).

Off*:

Do not display tracking dots.

Twin View 2D/3D

You can select whether to display the left map

screen of the Twin Map View in 2D or in 3D.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 39 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 4Modifying Map Configurations NAVI

2D:

Displays the 2D map.

3D*:

Displays the 3D map.

Show Mute Button

Selects whether to display or hide the voice

guidance mute key on the map.

View*:

Displays the voice guidance mute on the map.

Hide:

Hides the voice guidance mute key from the

map.

Show Speed Limit

Selects whether to display or hide the speed

limit of the current road.

• The speed limit display may not match the

actual speed limit of the current road. This

is not a definite value. Be sure to drive

according to the actual speed limit.

Hide*:

Hides the speed limit from the map.

View:

Displays the speed limit on the map.

❒If you change the setting of [km / mile] in

the [Regional Settings], the unit of speed

limit changes accordingly.

Show Traffic Incident

Selects whether to display or hide the traffic

notification icon on the map when incidents

are on your route.

➲“Checking traffic information manually” ➞

Page 63

View*:

Displays the icon on the map.

Hide:

Hides the icon from the map.

❒Notification icon will not be available when

your vehicle deviate from route.

Second Maneuver Arrow

Selects whether to display or hide the second

corner ahead of the vehicle on the map

(except for [Street List Mode]).

➲About Second Maneuver Arrow ➞ Page 35

View*:

Displays the second corner ahead of the vehi-

cle on the map.

Hide:

Hides the second corner ahead of the vehicle

on the map.

Bluetooth Connected

Selects whether to display or hide the icon for

current status of the phone connection via

Bluetooth wireless technology.

View*:

Displays the icon on the map.

Hide:

Hides the icon on the map.

➲About Bluetooth Connected icon ➞

Page 35

Speed limit

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 40 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 4 Modifying Map ConfigurationsNAVI

Selecting the Shortcut

Select shortcuts to display on the map screen. In

the list displayed on screen, the items with red

checks are displayed on the map screen. Touch

the shortcut you want to display and then touch

[OK] when a red check appears. You can select

up to five shortcuts.

1Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then

touch [Short-Cut Selection].

The Short-Cut Selection screen appears.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

2Touch the item which you want to set in

the shortcut menu.

The item with a red tick mark is displayed in

the shortcut menu.

: Registration*

the location indicated by the scroll cursor.

➲Register to Address Book ➞ Page 54

: Vicinity Search*

Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of

the scroll cursor.

➲“Finding a POI in Vicinity” ➞ Page 47

: Overlay POI*

Displays icon for surrounding facilities (POI)

on the map.

➲“Displaying POI on the Map” ➞ Page 41

: Volume*

Display [Volume Setting].

➲Volume ➞ Page 77

: Phone Book*

Displays [Phone Book].

➲“Calling a number in the Phone Book” ➞

Page 71

➲“Editing the Phone Book data” ➞ Page 74

: Dial Favourite 1 to 5

You can make a call to the phone number reg-

istered in [Dial Favourite].

➲“Registering a phone number in Dial

Favourite” ➞ Page 73

: Whole Route Overview

Displays the entire route (currently set).

➲“Checking the entire route overview at the

map” ➞ Page 27

: Traffic On Route

Displaying a list of traffic information on the route.

➲Displaying traffic information on the route

➞ Page 62

: Traffic List

Displaying a list of traffic events information.

➲“Checking all traffic information” ➞

Page 61

: Day/Night Display

Switches Day/Night Display setting.

➲“Setting the Map Colour Change between

Day and Night” ➞ Page 43

3To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Displaying POI on the Map

Displays on the map the icon for surrounding

facilities (POI).

1Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then

touch [Overlay POI].

2Touch [Display] to turn it [On].

❒If you do not want to display the POI icon

on the map, touch [Display] to turn it

[Off]. (Even if [Display] is turned [Off],

the POI selection setting is retained.)

3Touch the category you want to display.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 41 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 4Modifying Map Configurations NAVI

4Touch [Select Detail].

[Select All]:

Selects all detailed categories that are

included in that category. (E.g. all categories

of restaurants including Japanese and fast

food.)

[Deselect All]:

Deselects the selected category.

5Touch the desired detailed category.

❒You can select up to 100 items from the

detailed category.

The category already set will have a red tick

mark.

6Touch [OK].

Returns previous screen.

7To finish the selection, touch [OK].

➲“Viewing the information of a specified

location” ➞ Page 36

Browsing the Map Colour Expla-

nation

You can browse the type of the roads and areas

displayed on the map.

1Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then

touch [Map Legend].

2Touch the type which you want to see.

3Touch or to switch to the next page or

previous page.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

Day:

You can check the colour of the Day screen.

Night:

You can check the colour of the Night screen.

❒To return the previous screen, touch

[Back].

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 42 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 4 Modifying Map ConfigurationsNAVI

Changing the View Mode for the

Navigation Map

You can change the map display mode.

❒You cannot perform this operation in “Scroll

mode”.

1Touch [Map] in the navigation menu, then

touch [View Mode].

2Touch the type which you want to set.

➲“How to Use the Map” ➞ Page 31

Setting the Map Colour Change

between Day and Night

To improve the visibility of the map during the

evening, you can set the timing to change the

combination of the map colour.

1Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2Touch [Day/Night Display] to change the

setting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

Automatic*:

You can change the colours of a map between

daytime and nighttime according to whether

the vehicle lights are On or Off.

Day:

The map is always displayed with daytime col-

ours.

❒To use this function with [Automatic], the

Orange/white lead of the navigation sys-

tem must be connected correctly.

❒You can also change the brightness of the

screen between daytime and nighttime by

[Dimmer].

➲“Operating the picture adjustment” ➞

Page 140

Changing the Setting of Naviga-

tion Interrupting Screen

Setting whether or not to switch to the navigation

screen from the AV screen automatically when

your vehicle approaches a guidance point such

as an intersection while displaying a screen other

than navigation.

1Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2Touch [AV Guide Mode] to change the

setting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

On*:

Switching from audio operation screen to nav-

igation screen.

Off:

Screen is not switched.

Changing the Map Colour

You can set the map colour to bluish or reddish.

1Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2Touch [Road Color] to change the setting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

Red*:

Changes to red based map colours.

Blue:

Changes to blue based map colours.

❒Check the colour change with the [Map

Legend].

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 43 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 4Modifying Map Configurations NAVI

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 44 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

NAVI Chapter 5 Setting a Route to Your Destination

Chapter 5

Setting a Route to Your Destination

• For safety reasons, these route-setting

functions are not available while your

vehicle is in motion. To enable these func-

tions, you must stop in a safe place and

put on the handbrake before setting your

route. (see page 14 Interlock for details).

❒Some information on traffic regulations

depends on the time when the route calcula-

tion is performed. Thus, the information may

not correspond with a certain traffic regula-

tion when your vehicle actually passes the

location. Also, the information on the traffic

regulations provided will be for a passenger

vehicle, and not for a truck or other delivery

vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic regu-

lations when driving.

Searching for Points of Interest

(POI) Country Wide

Information about various facilities (Points Of

Interest - POI), such as petrol stations, hotels or

restaurants, is available. By entering the POI

Name, you can search for a POI.

❒You can also narrow down the search range

by initially specifying the name of the city

where your destination is located and also by

initially specifying the category.

❒Use the functions [POI Search] and

[Vicinity Search] in different situations. In

[POI Search], the distance is not limited

within the selected country, but in [Vicinity

Search], the distance for the search is limited

to within a 16 km (10 mile) radius.

The following three methods are available for

searching facilities by POI:

• Searching a POI from a name of the facilities

directly

• Searching for POIs by specifying a category

first

• Searching for POIs by specifying a city name

first

Searching a POI from a name of

the facilities directly

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [POI Search].

2Touch the country code key of the desti-

nation and select the country.

➲Selecting the country where you want to

search ➞ Page 20

3Input the name of the facilities.

[City]:

Touch to specify the destination city or area,

and then input the city name. (This is available

only when [Name] is blank.)

[Category]:

Touch to specify the POI category. (This is

available only when [Name] and [City] are

blank.)

[List]:

Lists candidate based on yellow characters in

the text box (suggested character in white is

invalid). Touch the desired facility in the list to

proceed to the next step.

❒When the options are narrowed down to

six or less, a list of the matched facilities

automatically appears.

When you enter the same characters as

those entered previously, the system auto-

matically displays the character string that

follows the entered characters. (Auto fill-in

function.)

➲“Auto fill-in function” ➞ Page 21

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 45 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 5Setting a Route to Your Destination NAVI

❒If less than six POIs in a detailed category

are available, the screen for inputting the

POI name is skipped. Please proceed to

Step 7.

4Touch .

Touching sorts the items in the list

in the order of distance.

Sorts the items in the list in the alphabetical

order.

❒You can use this sort function only when

the candidates are less than or equal to

2000.

5Touch desired POI for your destination.

Icons are helpful for quickly telling the cate-

gory of facilities with the same name.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲“Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 24

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲“To check the location at the map” ➞

Page 23

❒Touching displays a map of the sur-

roundings of the selected POI.

❒If the selected POI is the name of a chain

of outlets and consequently the same store

name applies to different locations (the

number of outlets appears next to the

chain’s name), touch the name of the POI

to display a list of those POIs with city

name and street name, touch to set the

POI as your destination.

Searching for POIs by specify-

ing a category first

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [POI Search].

2Touch the country code key of the desti-

nation and select the country.

➲Selecting the country where you want to

search ➞ Page 20

3Touch [Category].

4Touch the desired category.

POI’s are divided into several categories.

If the category is not sub-divided into more

detailed categories, the list will not be dis-

played. Proceed to Step 6.

[Name]:

Touch if you want to first specify the POI

name.

[City]:

Touch if you want to first specify the destina-

tion city or area.

[Back]:

Return the Destination menu.

5Touch the detailed category.

6Input the name of the facilities.

➲Subsequent Operations (“Searching a POI

from a name of the facilities directly”)➞

Page 45 (Step 3 to 5)

Category

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 47 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 5Setting a Route to Your Destination NAVI

4Touch the desired detailed category.

The category already set will have a red tick

mark.

5Touch [Back].

Returns previous screen.

6Repeat Step 2 to 5 to select a category.

You can select from the detailed category up

to 100 items.

7Touch [OK].

The POI in the selected category or subcate-

gory is searched.

Names of POIs and their distance from your

current location appear. They are listed in

order from nearest to farthest. To the left of

each item is an icon indicating the category.

8Touch desired POI for your destination.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲“Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 24

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲“To check the location at the map” ➞

Page 23

❒When you touch , the POIs around the

specified location are shown on a map.

Searching for the facilities

around the scroll cursor

Searching range is approximately 16 km

(10 miles) square from the scroll cursor.

❒This can be used when Vicinity Search is

selected in Short-Cut Selection.

➲Changing Shortcut ➞ Page 41

1Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor

to the place where you want to search for

POI.

2Touch .

The shortcut menu appears.

3Touch .

See Step 2 of “Searching for the facilities

around the current position” for the following

operations.

➲“Searching for the facilities around the

current position” ➞ Page 47

❒The distance indicated in the search result

is the distance from the scroll cursor to the

facility.

❒The bottom icon is for shortcuts to your

favourite categories. Touching the short-

cuts icon displays a list of the facilities in a

category.

➲“Registering/deleting POI Shortcuts” ➞

Page 50

❒[Vicinity Search] in the navigation menu

searches your surroundings. On the other

hand, in the case of in the Shortcut

menu (➞ Page 37), the area around the

scroll cursor after the map is scrolled will

be searched.

Finding Your Destination by

Specifying the Postcode

If you know the postcode of your destination, you

can use it to find your destination.

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Postal Code

Search].

The postcode input screen appears.

Distance to the facility

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 48 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 5 Setting a Route to Your DestinationNAVI

2Touch the country code key of the desti-

nation country.

3Input the postcode.

A list of cities with the specified postal code is

shown (except for the following cases).

British postcode:

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲“Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 24

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲“To check the location at the map” ➞

Page 23

Netherlands postcode:

• If you input a complete postcode (6 digits),

a list of street is shown. Select the street

and proceed to Step 5.

• If you input a partial postcode (4 digits), and

touch [List], a list of cities is shown. Pro-

ceed to Step 4.

4Touch the city or area where your destina-

tion is located.

5Input the street name.

If there is no house number, a route calcula-

tion starts.

6Input the house number.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲“Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 24

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲“To check the location at the map” ➞

Page 23

Route Calculation to Your Home

Location or to Your Favourite

Location

If your home location is registered, the route

home can be calculated by a single touch of the

touch key from the navigation menu. Also, you

can register one location, such as your work-

place, as your favourite location, and the route is

calculated in a similar way.

➲“Registering Your Home and Your Favourite

Location” ➞ Page 53

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Return Home] or

[Go to].

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲“Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 24

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲“To check the location at the map” ➞

Page 23

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 49 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 5Setting a Route to Your Destination NAVI

Selecting Destination from the

Destination History and Address

Book

Any place that has been searched before is

stored in [Destination History]. Places that you

have registered manually, such as your home,

are stored in [Address Book]. Simply select the

place you want to go to from the list and a route

to that place will be calculated.

➲For information on Address Book ➞ Page 55

➲For information on Destination History ➞

Page 59

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Address Book] or

[Destination History].

2Touch your destination name.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

➲“Checking and modifying the route” ➞

Page 24

When the route is already set, “Location con-

firmation screen” is shown.

➲“To check the location at the map” ➞

Page 23

❒You can also see the destination by touch-

ing on the right of the list.

Registering/deleting POI Short-

cuts

You can register up to six shortcuts to your

favourite POI. You can also change or delete the

registered shortcuts.

❒You can register a POI shortcut by touching

on the Shortcut-menu. The registering

and deleting steps are almost the same as

described below.

Registering a POI shortcut

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].

2Touch [Set].

Displays a list of already registered POI short-

cuts.

3Touch [Add].

Displays a POI category list.

4Touch category.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 50 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 5 Setting a Route to Your DestinationNAVI

5Touch the POI selection method.

[Select All]:

Selects all detailed categories that are

included in that category. (E.g. all categories

of restaurants including Japanese and fast

food)

[Select Detail]:

Selects one of the detail categories.

Touching a category adds that category to the

shortcuts.

Deleting a POI shortcut

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].

2Touch [Set].

3Touch [Delete].

Displays a list of already registered POI short-

cuts.

4Touch the category to be deleted.

A red check appears on the selected shortcut.

All (None):

A red check will appear or disappear on all

registered categories.

5Touch [Delete].

Deletes the selected shortcut from the list.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 51 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 5Setting a Route to Your Destination NAVI

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 52 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 6 Registering and Editing LocationsNAVI

Chapter 6

Registering and Editing Locations

• For safety reasons, these functions are not

available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop

in a safe place and put on the handbrake

before setting your route (see page 14

Interlock for details).

Registering Locations Overview

Registering places you visit frequently saves time

and effort. Also, routes to registered locations

can be calculated easily by touching the corre-

spond touch key. This registered location infor-

mation can also be modified.

The registered locations are categorised into

the following three types:

•: Home location:

home location is registered, the route to your

home can be set by simply touching [Return

Home] in the Destination menu. Only one

location can be registered.

•: Favorite location:

visit (for example, your office). Once your

favourite location is registered, route to your

favourite location can be set by simply touch-

ing [Go to] in the Destination menu. Only one

location can be registered.

•: (default): Address Book entry:

Once locations are registered, you can set the

route by selecting an item from Address

Book.

❒The items in Address Book are automatically

updated in alphabetic order. However, [Home

location] and [Favorite location] always

appear at the top (if you registered them).

Registering Your Home and

Your Favourite Location

You can register one home location and one

favourite location. You can change the registered

information later. You might find it useful to regis-

ter your workplace or a relative’s home as your

favourite location.

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Defined Locations].

2Touch [Go to].

When registering your home location, touch

[Home].

3Search for a location to register.

You can select a method of location search.

➲Address Search ➞ Page 20

➲Information on searching locations to reg-

ister ➞ Page 45 to 50

❒If you select [Map Search], move the

scroll cursor to the place you want to set

and touch [OK].

4Point the scroll cursor to the location you

want to register and touch [OK].

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

➲“Editing the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 55

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 53 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 6Registering and Editing Locations NAVI

5Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

Registering location into

Address Book

The Address Book can store up to 400 regis-

tered locations. These can include home loca-

tion, favourite places, and destinations you have

already registered.

Registering location by scroll mode

You can perform the following operation when

[Registration] is selected in [Short-cut selec-

tion].

1Scroll to the location you want to register.

2Display the shortcut menu, and touch

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

➲“Editing the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 55

3Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

Registering location by Address

Book

1Touch [Address Book] in the Destination

menu.

2Touch [Add].

3Select the search method, search the loca-

tion, and display the map.

4When the map of the location you want to

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

➲“Editing the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 55

5Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 54 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 6 Registering and Editing LocationsNAVI

Viewing of the Address Book

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Address Book].

(1) Home location:

The item displayed with icon is the home

location. Touch to calculate the route.

➲“Registering Your Home and Your Favour-

ite Location” ➞ Page 53

(2) Favourite location:

The item displayed with icon is the

favourite location. Touch to calculate the

route.

➲“Registering Your Home and Your Favour-

ite Location” ➞ Page 53

(3) Address Book entry:

Touch to calculate the route.

(4) :

The map of that location can be displayed.

➲“To check the location at the map” ➞

Page 23

(5) :

The information related to that place can be

edited.

➲“Editing the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 55

(6) :

Sorts the items in the list in order of the dis-

tance from the vehicle position.

❒Active if the list item number is not equal

to 0 and current sort is not by distance

form current position.

(7) :

It is the default sorting order.

❒Active if the list item number is not equal

to 0 and current sort is not by alphabeti-

cally.

(8) :

Sorts the items in the list in order of the

recently used items.

❒Active if the List item number is not equal

to 0 and current sort is not by last used.

(9) [Add]:

The screen for selecting the method for regis-

tering the location in Address Book appears.

➲“Registering location into Address Book”

➞ Page 54

(10) [Delete]:

Deletes the registered locations.

➲“Deleting the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 58

(11) [Back]:

Returns previous screen.

Editing the entry in “Address

Book”

In the Address Book menu, touching on the

right-hand side of the place displays the Edit reg-

istered information screen.

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Address Book].

2Touch on the right-hand side of the

location whose information you want to

edit.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (5)

(7)

(6)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(8)

(7) (5)(6)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 55 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 6Registering and Editing Locations NAVI

(1) Name

You can enter the desired name.

(2) Pronunciation

You can enter the desired pronunciation inde-

pendently from the name. The registered pro-

nunciation is used for voice recognition.

➲Information on voice operation ➞

Chapter 15

❒If nothing is entered in the text box, you

cannot use that item as the voice com-

mands.

❒When you switch the language of the navi-

gation system, the registered pronuncia-

tions cannot be used for voice recognition.

(3) Phone #

The phone number of the registered location.

You can dial this number by using (8).

(4) Icon

The symbol displayed on the map and

Address Book.

(5) Picture

As you approach the location, the registered

image appears.

You can register the picture stored in the navi-

gation system. You can also import and regis-

ter a picture shot from a digital camera etc.,

by using a CD-ROM.

(6) Sound

The selected sound is played when you

approach the location.

(7) Modify Location

You can change the registered location by

scrolling the map.

(8)

Only when the Bluetooth unit is connected to

the navigation system and the mobile phone

featuring Bluetooth technology is also con-

nected, you can make a phone call to the reg-

istered phone number (3) by touching .

➲“Dialling the entry in the Address Book” ➞

Page 72

When you approach the registered loca-

tion while travelling

When the location with a sound effect and an

image are registered comes into

approx. 300 m (0.19 miles) radius from the

vehicle position, the sound effect plays and

the image appears.

Changing a name

1Touch [Name], then touch [Yes].

The message confirming whether or not to

is displayed.

When not registering a name as a voice com-

mand, select [No].

2Enter a new name, then touch [OK].

The current name appears in the text box.

Delete the current name, and enter a new

name between 1 and 23 characters long.

3If the pronunciation is suitable, touch

[Yes].

The details you set are registered, and the

Address Book menu appears.

Alternative options:

No:

Completes the registration without editing the

pronunciation.

Repeat:

You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the

name you entered.

❒If the pronunciation is not desired one, edit

the character so that the pronunciation

can be match with your intention.

No sounds can be output during .

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 56 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 6 Registering and Editing LocationsNAVI

❒When you confirm the pronunciation,

is shown on the left side of the location

name displayed in “Address Book menu”.

This icon indicates that this name can be

used as a voice command during voice

operation.

❒You cannot change the name of your

home.

Changing a pronunciation

1Touch [Pronunciation].

2Enter a new pronunciation, then touch

[OK].

The current pronunciation appears in the text

box (if you already set). Delete the current pro-

nunciation, and enter a new pronunciation

between 1 and 23 characters long.

3If the pronunciation is suitable, touch

[Yes].

The details you set are registered, and the

Address Book menu appears.

Alternative options:

No:

Cancels the editing.

Repeat:

You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the

name you entered.

❒If the pronunciation is not desired one, edit

the character so that the pronunciation

can be match with your intention.

❒When you confirm the pronunciation,

is shown on the left side of the location

name displayed in the Address Book

menu. This mark indicates that this name

can be used as a voice command during

voice operation.

❒You cannot change the pronunciation of

your home.

❒If nothing is entered in the text box, you

cannot use that item as the voice com-

mands.

Entering or changing a phone number

1Touch [Phone #].

2Input a phone number, then touch [OK].

The Address Information menu appears.

❒To change a registered phone number,

delete the existing number and then enter

a new one.

Selecting an icon to appear on the map

1Touch [Icon].

2Touch the desired icon to appear on the

map.

The Address Information menu appears.

❒You cannot change the icon of your home

and your favourite location.

❒If you set (dot), the registered name of

that entry can be displayed on the map.

Customising the picture

You can customise a picture for the entry of the

Address Book. Some pictures are already stored

in the hard disk drive, and you can also import

JPEG format pictures, such as a picture on your

digital camera by using CD-R(-RW). If you burn

the pictures into a CD-R (-RW) by your PC and

insert that to the navigation system, you can use

them.

Here, a method for changing the picture is

described with an example of loading a picture

stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation sys-

tem.

No sounds can be output during .

Be sure to read “Limitations for import the

picture” before creating the CD-R (-RW).

➲“Limitations for import the picture” ➞

Page 83

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 57 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 6Registering and Editing Locations NAVI

1Check that no disc is inserted, and insert

your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.

2Touch [Picture], and then touch [Import

from Disc].

The list of the pictures stored in a CD-R (-RW)

is displayed.

❒Touching other than [Import from Disc]

allows you to select an image stored on the

hard disk drive.

3Touch a picture you want to set.

❒To cancel displaying the picture, select

[No Picture].

4Touch [Yes].

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

No:

This is selected when you want to change to

another picture. Return to Step 3.

Selecting sound

1Touch [Sound].

2Select the desired sound.

❒To turn off the sound, select [No Sound].

3Touch [Sound] to hear the sound.

4Touch [Set].

Changing the position of locations

1Touch [Modify Location].

The map of the selected area and its sur-

roundings appears.

2Touch the screen to change its position,

then touch [OK].

Deleting the entry in “Address

Book”

Items registered in the Address Book can be

deleted. All entries of the data in the Address

Book can be deleted at once.

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Address Book].

2Touch [Delete].

“Delete from Address Book” screen appears.

3Select the location you want to delete.

A tick mark appears by the selected location.

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

All:

Selects all entries.

None:

Displayed when all locations are being

selected. Cancels all selected locations.

4Touch [Delete].

5Select [Yes].

The data you selected is deleted.

Alternative option:

No:

Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4.

❒Because deleted data cannot be restored,

take extra care not to delete by mistake.

No sounds can be output during .

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 58 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 6 Registering and Editing LocationsNAVI

Destination History Operations

The points to which route has been calculated in

the past are automatically saved in Destination

History.

❒If no location is stored in Destination History,

you cannot select [Destination History]. (If

you perform a route calculation, you can

select [Destination History].)

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Destination History].

(1) Destination history:

Touch to calculate the route.

(2) [Delete]:

Deletes the selected history.

(3) [Back]:

Returns previous screen.

Deleting the entry in

“Destination History”

Items in the Destination History can be

deleted. All entries of the data in the Destination

History can be deleted at once.

1Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Destination History].

2Touch [Delete].

“Delete from history” screen appears.

3Select the location you want to delete.

A tick mark appears by the selected location.

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

All:

Selects all entries.

None:

Displayed when all locations are being

selected. Cancels all selected locations.

4Touch [Delete].

5Select [Yes].

The data you selected is deleted.

Alternative option:

No:

Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4.

❒Because deleted data cannot be restored,

take extra care not to delete by mistake.

(1)

(2)

(3)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 59 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 6Registering and Editing Locations NAVI

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 60 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

NAVI Chapter 7 Using Traffic Information

Chapter 7

Using Traffic Information

Using RDS-TMC Information

You can check real-time traffic information trans-

mitted by the Traffic Message Channel (TMC) of

the FM Radio Data System (RDS) on the screen.

Such traffic information is updated periodically.

When the navigation system receives updated

traffic information, the navigation system will

overlay the traffic information on your map, and

also display detailed text information when availa-

ble. When you are travelling along a route and

there is traffic information on your current route,

the system will detect it, and ask you if you would

like to be rerouted, or suggest another route auto-

matically.

❒The system acquires the traffic information in

the range between 32 km and 160 km in diam-

eter from the vehicle position. (According to

the amount of traffic information acquired at

the same time, the reception range is auto-

matically adjusted in the range between

32 km and 160 km with your vehicle at the

centre.)

❒The navigation system provides the following

functions by using the information from RDS-

TMC service:

• Displaying a list of traffic information

• Displaying traffic information on a map

• Suggesting a route to avoid traffic jam

by using traffic information

❒The term “traffic jam” in this section indicates

the following types of traffic information: slow,

queuing and stationary traffic and closed/

blocked roads. This information is always

taken into consideration when checking your

route, and the information related with these

events cannot be turned off. If you select other

traffic information in [Traffic Settings], the

information can be displayed in a list or on a

map.

➲“Selecting traffic information to display” ➞

Page 64

Viewing traffic list

Traffic Information is displayed on screen in a list.

This allows you to check how many traffic inci-

dents have occurred, their location, and their dis-

tance from your current position.

Checking all traffic information

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Traffic List].

The list with received traffic information is

shown.

2Touch or to view the incident list.

Places (street names) where incidents have

occurred are displayed in the list.

(1) Street or place

(2) Direction

(3) Incident

(4) Distance to the location

(5) The incident numbers currently dis-

played and the total number of incidents

❒The incidents that have already been read

will be displayed in white. Unread inci-

dents will be in yellow.

(3)

(1) (2) (4)

(6)

(7)

(5)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 61 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 7Using Traffic Information NAVI

(6) Sort key

You can sort the traffic information in alpha-

betical order.

You can sort the traffic information by dis-

tance from your current position.

For the list displayed when you touch [Traffic

List], the list will be sorted according to the

linear distance from the vehicle position to the

traffic information.

For the list displayed when you touch [Traffic

On Route], the list will be sorted according to

the distance from the vehicle position to the

traffic information.

You can sort the traffic information according

to the incident.

The list will be sorted in the order of closed/

blocked roads, traffic jam, accidents, road

works, and others.

When new traffic information is received, cur-

rent information is changed, or old informa-

tion has been removed, the list is updated to

reflect the new situation.

(7)

Touching allows you to check the location

on a map. (Traffic information without posi-

tional information cannot be checked on a

map.)

3Select an incident you want to view in

detail.

The details of the selected incident are dis-

played.

• Touching an incident you want to see

allows you to view the detailed information

of the incident. If the information cannot be

displayed on one screen, touch or to

view the remaining information.

4Touch [Back] to return to the list with

traffic information.

A list with traffic information appears again.

Checking traffic information on the

route

All traffic information on the current route is dis-

played on screen in a list.

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Traffic On Route].

The currently set traffic information on the

route appears on screen.

❒The method for checking the content dis-

played on the screen is the same for

“Checking traffic information”.

Confirming traffic information

on the map

❒A line displayed only when the map scale

is 5 km (2.5 mile) or lower.

❒Icon appears only when the scale on the

map is 20 km (10 mi) or lower. (If the scale

is 2 km (1 mi) or higher, the icons are

resized smaller.)

❒Traffic-related items are not displayed on

“City Map”.

Traffic event icon and line

The traffic event information displayed on the

map is as follows.

with yellow line:

Slow and queuing traffic

with red line:

Stationary traffic

with black line:

Closed/blocked roads

etc.:

For the meaning of the icon, see [Traffic Set-

tings] in the Information menu.

➲“Selecting traffic information to display” ➞

Page 64

If you want to check the traffic information details

at the map, move the scroll cursor onto an icon

Traffic event icon

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 62 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 7 Using Traffic InformationNAVI

such as and touch . This allows you to view

place names and other detail information.

Setting alternative route to

avoid traffic jam

The navigation system checks at certain time

intervals whether or not there is the traffic infor-

mation on your route. If the navigation system

detects any traffic jam on your current route, the

system tries to find a better route in the back-

ground.

❒Following types of traffic incidents on the

route will be checked: slow, queuing and sta-

tionary traffic and closed/blocked roads.

Checking traffic jam automatically

If there is information of traffic jam on your cur-

rent route and if an alternative route can be

found, the navigation system will recommend you

new alternative route automatically. In such case,

the following screen will appear.

❒There is no action if the system cannot find

any traffic jam information on your route or

the system cannot find an alternative.

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

New:

The recommended route is displayed on the

screen.

Current:

The current route is displayed on the screen.

OK:

The displayed route is set.

❒When no selection is made, the current route

will be automatically selected after a short

while.

Checking traffic information manually

Touching notification icon on the map screen

allows you to check traffic information on your

route while icon is displayed. Only if there is any

traffic information on your route, notification icon

is displayed on the navigation map screen.

❒Notification icon will not be available when

your vehicle deviate from route.

1Set [Show Traffic Incident] to [View].

➲“Show Traffic Incident” ➞ Page 40

2Press the MAP button to display the cur-

rent location.

The icon appears when the system acquires

traffic information on the current route.

3Touch icon during the icon is displayed.

The displayed icon indicates the type of the

traffic information.

4Touch [Diversion] to search alternative

route.

❒Only if the system can find the information

related traffic jam, [Diversion] will be ena-

ble.

After touching [Diversion], the route is recal-

culated taking all traffic jam on your current

route into account.

❒The traffic information displayed on the

notification icon is the traffic information

on the route closest to the vehicle position.

If you touch [Diversion], the route is recal-

culated by taking into account not only this

information, but also all traffic jam infor-

mation on the route.

Distance from the current position of

your vehicle to the point of entry into

the new route.

Difference in distance and travel time

between existing route and new route.

Notification icon

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 63 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 7Using Traffic Information NAVI

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

List:

Only the three last traffic events received on

your route are listed in this traffic list.

Back:

The message disappears, and the map display

reappears.

For the subsequent operations, see “Checking

traffic jam automatically”.

➲“Checking traffic jam automatically” ➞

Page 63

Selecting traffic information to

display

There are different types of traffic information

that can be received via the RDS-TMC service,

and you can select which types will be incorpo-

rated and displayed on your navigation system.

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Traffic Settings].

2Touch [Displayed traffic information].

The names of the displayed traffic information

items and a list of icons appears on the

screen.

3Touch the traffic information item to dis-

play.

A red check appears next to the selected traf-

fic information.

❒Touching [All (None)] selects or deselect

all traffic information.

4Touch [OK].

The selected traffic information icon is added

to the screen.

❒The following types of traffic incidents can-

not be deselected and are always dis-

played and taken into consideration: slow,

queuing and stationary traffic and closed/

blocked roads.

5Touch [Back].

Selecting preferred RDS-TMC

service provider manually

A default preferred TMC service provider for each

country has been set. The navigation system

tunes to the radio station with good reception

internally among the preferred RDS-TMC service

provider. If you want to set another preferred

RDS-TMC service provider, you can select the one

from available RDS-TMC service providers manu-

ally.

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [TMC Provider

Selection].

Available service provider can be searched

automatically.

2Touch the desired service provider on the

list.

After touching a service provider, the system

starts tuning to the selected RDS-TMC service

provider. When the tuning is successful, the

system returns to the map display.

The preferred RDS-TMC

service provider currently set

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 64 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 7 Using Traffic InformationNAVI

❒When the service provider name is not

available, the station name or frequency

will be shown instead.

❒If available providers cannot be displayed

on one screen, touch or to view the

remaining providers.

❒When the tuning has failed, select another

service provider or try again after moving

to another location.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 65 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 7Using Traffic Information NAVI

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 66 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

NAVI Chapter 8 Using Hands-free Phoning

Chapter 8

Using Hands-free Phoning

Hands-free Phoning Overview

• For your safety, avoid talking on the phone

as much as possible while driving.

If your mobile phone featuring Bluetooth technol-

ogy, this navigation system can be connected to

your mobile phone wirelessly. Using this hands-

free function, you can operate the navigation sys-

tem to make or receive phone calls. You can also

transfer the phone book data stored in your

mobile phone to the navigation system.

This section describes how to set up a Bluetooth

connection, and how to operate a mobile phone

featuring Bluetooth technology on the navigation

system.

The following description assumes that the

device name of the mobile phone to be con-

nected using Bluetooth wireless technology is set

to [My mobile phone].

Preparing communication

devices

To use the mobile phone featuring Bluetooth

wireless technology on the navigation system,

the Bluetooth unit (ND-BT1) is required.

Precautions on using a mobile phone

featuring Bluetooth technology

❒Please read “Notes for hands-free phoning”

for your reference.

➲“Notes for hands-free phoning” ➞ Page 75

❒When the power of the navigation system

turns off, Bluetooth is also disconnected.

When the system restarts, the system auto-

matically attempts to reconnect the mobile

phone previously connected. Even when the

connection is cut for some reason, the system

automatically reconnects the specified mobile

phone (except for the case where the connec-

tion is cut by the mobile phone operation).

You can open [Phone Menu] directly by pressing

and holding the MENU button.

❒You can check the signal strength for connec-

tion between your mobile phone and Blue-

tooth unit with [Connection Status] in

[Hardware] Menu.

➲[Connection Status] ➞ Page 79

❒You can set the voice volume and ring volume

with [Volume] in Settings Menu.

➲[Volume] ➞ Page 77

❒You can set to mute peripheral sounds during

hands-free phoning.

➲[Mute Set] ➞ Page 137

While your mobile phone featuring Bluetooth

wireless technology is connected, is dis-

played on the map.

❒If you operate using the “CD-SR1” Steering

Remote Control (sold separately), the follow-

ing buttons can be used for operation:

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:

Same function as on the screen.

(Except for [Received Calls].)

By connecting the Bluetooth unit, you can

use the functions described in this manual,

including hands-free phoning or phone book

transfer. To use these functions, the mobile

phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technol-

ogy that you want to connect must have a

supported profile that is the same as the pro-

file for the Bluetooth unit. For the supported

profile, refer to the owner’s manual of the

Bluetooth unit.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 67 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 8Using Hands-free Phoning NAVI

VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:

Same function as or on the

screen.

PHONE MENU button:

Open [Phone Menu] directly.

Setting up for hands-free phon-

ing

Before you can use the hands-free phoning func-

tion, you will need to set up the navigation system

for using that function. This entails registering

your mobile phone with the navigation system

and establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection

between the navigation system and your mobile

phone.

Registering your mobile phone

You need to register your mobile phone featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology when you connect

it for the first time. A total of five phones can be

registered. Two registration methods are availa-

ble:

• Registration from the navigation system

• Registration from the mobile phone

❒Once you registered that phone, you can

select that mobile phone from the list to con-

nect it without registration.

❒If you try to register the mobile phone more

than five, the system will ask you to select one

from the registered mobile phones to over-

write.

➲“Connecting a registered mobile phone” ➞

Page 69

❒The default device name displayed on the

mobile phone is [PIONEER NAVI]. The

default password is [1111].

Operating from the navigation system

1Activate the Bluetooth wireless technol-

ogy on your mobile phone.

For some mobile phone no specific action is

necessary in activation for Bluetooth wireless

technology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your mobile phone.

2Touch [Info/Phone] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

4Touch [Registration].

5Touch [Navi].

The system searches the mobile phones Blue-

tooth technology that are waiting for the con-

nection and displays them in the list.

6Wait until your mobile phone appears in

the list.

❒If you cannot find the mobile phone you

want to connect, check that the mobile

phone is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless

technology connection.

7Select the mobile phone you want to reg-

ister from the list.

8Enter the password of the navigation sys-

tem to register it using your mobile

phone.

After the registration is completed, the follow-

ing screen appears.

❒If registration fails, repeat the procedure

from the beginning. If a connection still

cannot be established, try connecting

using your mobile phone.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 68 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 8 Using Hands-free PhoningNAVI

Operating from your mobile phone

1Activate the Bluetooth wireless technol-

ogy on your mobile phone.

For some mobile phone no specific action is

necessary in activation for Bluetooth wireless

technology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your mobile phone.

2Touch [Info/Phone] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

4Touch [Registration].

5Touch [Mobile].

The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth

wireless technology connection.

6Operate your mobile phone to register the

navigation system.

If your mobile phone asks you to enter a pass-

word, enter the password of the navigation

system.

After the registration is completed, the follow-

ing screen appears.

❒If registration fails repeat the procedure

from the beginning.

Connecting a registered mobile phone

The navigation system automatically connects

the mobile phone selected as a target of connec-

tion. However, connect the mobile phone manu-

ally in the following cases:

• Two or more mobile phones are registered, and

you want to manually select the mobile phone

to be used.

• You want to reconnect a disconnected mobile

phone.

• Connection cannot be established automati-

cally for some reason.

❒Unregistered mobile phones cannot be con-

nected.

1Activate the Bluetooth wireless

technology on your mobile phone.

For some mobile phone no specific action is

necessary in activation for Bluetooth wireless

technology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your mobile phone.

2Touch [Info/Phone] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

4Touch [Connection].

5Touch a mobile phone name you want to

connect.

When a connection is successfully estab-

lished, a connection complete message

appears, and the system returns to the phone

menu screen.

❒To cancel the connection to your mobile

phone, touch [Cancel].

❒If connection fails, check whether your

mobile phone is waiting for a connection,

and then repeat the procedure from step 4.

Editing the device name

You can change the device name to be displayed

on your mobile phone. (Default is [PIONEER

NAVI].)

Phone name currently connected or

selected as a target of connection

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 69 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 8Using Hands-free Phoning NAVI

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

3Touch [Device Name].

4Touch any key to enter the name you

want to set and then touch [OK].

➲About Keypad operation ➞ Page 21

❒Up to 20 characters can be entered for a

device name.

Editing the password

You can change the password to be used for

authentication on your mobile phone. (Default is

[1111].)

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

3Touch [Password].

4Touch any key to enter the password you

want to set and then touch [OK].

➲About Keypad operation ➞ Page 21

❒Four to eight characters can be entered for

a password.

Receiving a phone call

You can use the navigation system to receive a

call hands-free.

The map screen shows the icon while your

mobile phone featuring Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology is connected. You can receive a hands-

free call only when the mobile phone is con-

nected.

Answering an incoming call

The system informs you that it is receiving a call

by displaying a message and producing a ring

sound once.

1When there is an incoming call, touch

When there is an incoming call, you can reject

the call by touching .

❒During a call, the is displayed at the

right-hand side of the screen.

2To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

The call ends.

❒If the received voice is too quiet to hear, you

can adjust the volume of the received voice.

➲Incoming Voice ➞ Page 77

❒Depending on the subscription status of the

caller ID service, the phone number of the

received call may not be displayed, and

[Unknown] appears instead.

❒You may hear a noise when you hang up the

phone.

Making a phone call

You can make a phone call in many different

ways.

Direct dialling

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2Touch [Dial].

Connecting icon

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 70 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 8 Using Hands-free PhoningNAVI

3Input the phone number, and then touch

to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ling, touch .

4To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

Dialling from the dialled number his-

tory or the received call history

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received

Calls].

The list of either one appears.

3Touch a name or telephone number from

the list to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ling, touch .

When you make a call to the phone number in

[Received Calls] without “+”, you can add

“+” in front of that number by touching [+].

To delete “+”, touch [+] again in that time.

Touch to make a call.

4To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

❒Up to 30 entries for each of the dialled

number and received call histories are

recorded automatically. When the number

of entries exceeds 30, the entries will be

deleted from the oldest one.

❒You can clear the dialled number or

received call history.

➲Clearing the dialled number or received

call history ➞ Page 75

Calling a number in the Phone Book

After finding the list in the Phone Book you want

to call, you can select the number and make the

call.

❒Before using this function, you need to trans-

fer the phone book stored in your mobile

phone to the navigation system.

➲“Transferring the phone book” ➞ Page 73

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2Touch [Phone Book].

The phone book screen appears.

3Touch a name from the list to make a call.

If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to

the first page of the contacts whose names

start with that letter.

Touch the entry in the list to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ling, touch .

4To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

Calling a number in the Dial Favourites

After finding the list in the Dial Favourite you

want to call, you can select the number and make

the call.

Date and time of the call dialled or received

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 71 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 8Using Hands-free Phoning NAVI

❒Before using this function, you need to set the

phone number from the phone book to Dial

Favourite.

➲Registering the phone number to Dial Favour-

ite ➞ Page 73

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2Touch [Dial Favourite].

The Dial Favourite screen appears.

3Touch one of [Favourite 1] to [Favourite 5]

to make a call.

Touch the entry to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ling, touch .

4To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

Dialling the entry in the Address Book

You can make a call to the entry registered in the

address book.

❒You cannot make a call to locations if phone

number is not registered.

1Display the Address Book.

➲Operation of the Address Book ➞ Page 55

2Touch of the entry you want to call.

The detail screen appears.

3Touch to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ling, touch .

4To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

Dialling a facility’s phone number

You can make a call to facilities with phone

number data.

1Perform [POI Search] or [Vicinity Search]

and display the detail information.

➲Operation of [POI Search] ➞ Page 45

➲Operation of [Vicinity Search] ➞ Page 47

2Touch of the entry you want to call.

The detail screen appears.

3Touch to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ling, touch .

4To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

Dialling from the map

You can make a call by selecting an icon of a reg-

istered location or a POI icon from the map

screen.

❒You cannot make a call to locations or POIs

that have no phone number data.

1Scroll the map, and point the cursor on an

icon on the map.

2Touch .

The detail screen appears.

3Touch to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ling, touch .

4To end the call, touch at the top right

of the screen.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 72 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 8 Using Hands-free PhoningNAVI

Transferring the phone book

You can transfer the data from the phone book

stored in your mobile phone to the phone book

stored in the navigation system.

By transferring the phone book to the navigation

system, you can browse the data in the trans-

ferred phone book on the screen of the navigation

system. You can also select the entries in the

phone book to make a call from the navigation

system or edit the data on the navigation system.

❒Depending on the mobile phone, “Phone

Book” may be called by “Contacts”, “Business

card” or something else.

❒The Phone Book can hold a total of 400

entries.

❒The Hands-free phoning connection is discon-

nected to establish the connection for phone

book transfer. When the phone book is trans-

ferred, hands-free phoning is reconnected

automatically.

❒The phone book of this navigation system can-

not assign the multiple telephone numbers for

one person’s name.

1Connect your mobile phone featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology.

➲“Registering your mobile phone” ➞

Page 68

2Touch [Info/Phone] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3Touch [Read Bus. Card].

If there is a phone book already transferred,

the following screen appears.

[Yes]:

Deletes all phone numbers stored in the

phone book, and then transfers the data.

[No]:

Stay the current entries and then adds new

data to the phone book. (Duplicate data can-

not be consolidated.)

❒If you want to keep the existing phone

book, select [No].

4Check that the following screen is dis-

played, and operate your mobile phone to

transfer the phone book entries.

The phone book entries in your mobile phone

are transferred to the navigation system. To

cancel the transfer, touch [Cancel].

❒Only the names and telephone numbers

can be transferred.

❒The transferred data can be edited on the

navigation system.

➲“Editing the Phone Book data” ➞ Page 74

Registering a phone number in

Dial Favourite

You can register up to five entries in the phone

book. Registering the phone numbers that you

frequently use in Dial Favourite will ease the dial-

ling operation. The names registered in Dial

Favourite can be operated from the shortcut

menu. You can also use Voice Recognition to

make a call by saying the phone number.

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2Touch [Dial Favourite].

3Touch [Set].

The Phone book screen appears.

4Touch the entry you want to register in

Favorite.

The Phone book Record screen appears.

5Touch [OK].

The selected entry is registered in the corre-

sponding Dial Favourite.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 73 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 8Using Hands-free Phoning NAVI

Editing the Phone Book data

You can edit the imported phone book data or

add new data. You can edit [Name], [Phone #],

or [Picture]. You can also delete unnecessary

data.

❒The data cannot be transferred back to the

mobile phone.

Adding new data

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2Touch [Phone Book].

3Touch or [Add].

The edit screen appears.

❒To add data by entering it as desired, touch

[Add].

4Select the entry you want to edit.

[Name] or [Phone #]:

Enter the name and the phone number to be

displayed in the phone book. Touch [OK] to

complete the input and return to the previous

screen.

➲About Keypad Operation ➞ Page 20

❒The name can be input 40 characters long

and phone number can be input 32 char-

acters long.

❒The edited names and phone numbers are

reflected to the dialled number history and

the received call history. However, they are

not reflected to the data registered in [Dial

Favourite].

[Picture]:

Sets the image to be displayed when a call is

received.

➲“Customising the incoming call picture for

a phone book entry” ➞ Page 74

5Touch [OK].

The selected data is added to the phone book.

Customising the incoming call picture

for a phone book entry

You can customise a picture for the phone book

record. Some pictures are already stored in the

hard disk drive, and you can also import JPEG for-

mat pictures, such as a picture on your digital

camera by using CD-R(-RW). If you burn the pic-

tures into a CD-R (-RW) by your PC and insert

that to the navigation system, you can use them.

Here, a method for changing the picture is

described with an example of loading a picture

stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation sys-

tem.

1Check that no disc is inserted, and insert

your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.

2Touch [Picture], and then touch [Import

from Disc].

The list of the pictures stored in a CD-R (-RW)

is displayed.

On this screen, you can select the following

item:

Back to Original:

The picture originally used when the system

was purchased is selected.

❒Touching other than [Import from Disc]

allows you to select a background image

stored on the hard disk drive.

3Touch a picture you want to set.

4Touch [Yes].

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

No:

This is selected when you want to change to

another picture. Return to Step 3.

Be sure to read “Limitations for import the pic-

ture” before creating the CD-R (-RW).

➲“Limitations for import the picture” ➞

Page 83

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 74 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 8 Using Hands-free PhoningNAVI

Deleting data

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2Touch [Phone Book].

3Touch [Delete].

The Phone Book Delete screen appears.

4Touch the entry you want to delete.

A red tick mark appears next to the selected

entry. To cancel the selection, touch the entry

again.

5Touch [Delete].

6Touch [Yes].

The data is deleted, and the current location

screen appears.

❒To cancel the deletion, touch [No].

Editing the received call or

dialled number history

You can edit the data in the dialled number his-

tory or the received call history. You can edit

[Name], [Phone #], or [Picture]. The edited

entries are registered in the phone book. You can

also delete the history data.

Editing data

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received

Calls].

3Touch .

The edit screen appears. Steps after this are

the same as for editing the phone book.

➲“Editing the Phone Book data” ➞ Page 74

❒The phone number cannot be edited if it is

already registered in the phone book.

Deleting data

1Touch [Info/Phone] in the Navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received

Calls].

3Touch [Delete].

4Touch [Yes].

All history data is deleted, and the current

location screen appears.

❒To cancel the deletion, touch [No].

Notes for hands-free phoning

General notes

• Connection to all mobile phones featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology is not guaran-

teed.

• The line-of-sight distance between this naviga-

tion system and your mobile phone must be 10

meters or less when sending and receiving

voice and data via Bluetooth technology. How-

ever, the transmission distance may become

shorter than the estimated distance, depend-

ing on the environment in use.

• You cannot delete the registered mobile

phone. If you need to delete it, refer to “Return-

ing the Navigation System to the Default or

Factory Settings”, and delete it together with

other functions.

• With some mobile phones, the speakers of the

system may not produce a ring sound.

• If the private mode is selected on the mobile

phone, hands-free phoning may not be per-

formed.

About registration and connection

• Operation of mobile phone varies depending

on the type of your mobile phone. Refer to the

instruction manual that came with your mobile

phone for detailed instructions.

About making and receiving calls

• You may hear a noise in the following situa-

tions:

– When you answer the phone by using the

button on the phone.

– When the person on the other end of line

hangs up the phone.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 75 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 8Using Hands-free Phoning NAVI

• With some mobile phones, even if you press

accept button on the mobile phone when a call

arrives, hands-free phoning may not be per-

formed.

• The registered name appears if the phone

number of the received call is already regis-

tered in the phone book. When one phone

number is registered under different names,

the name that starts with the alphabet that pre-

cedes that of the other is displayed.

• If the phone number of the received call is not

registered in the phone book, the phone

number of the received call appears.

About received call history and dialled

number history

• Calls made or editing performed only on your

mobile phone will not be reflected to the

dialled number history, or phone book in the

navigation system.

• You cannot make a call to the entry of an

unknown user (no phone number) in the

received call history.

• If calls are made by operating your mobile

phone, no history data will be recorded in the

navigation system.

About phone book transfer

• With some mobile phones, it may not be possi-

ble to transfer all items in the phone book at

one time. In this case, transfer item one by one

from your mobile phone.

• Depending on the mobile phone that is con-

nected to this navigation system via Bluetooth

technology, this navigation system cannot dis-

play the phone book correctly. (Some charac-

ters may be garbled or first name and last

name is put in reverse order.)

• If the phone book in the mobile phone contains

image data, phone book may not be correctly

transferred. (Image data cannot be transferred

from the mobile phone.)

❒Depending on the mobile phone, phone book

transfer cannot be available.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 76 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 9 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation FunctionsNAVI

Chapter 9

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

• For safety reasons, these functions are not

available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop

in a safe place and put on the handbrake

before setting your route (see page 14

Interlock for details).

Entering the Settings Menu

1Press the MENU button to display the

navigation menu.

2Touch [Settings] to display the Settings

menu.

3Change the setting.

➲Adjusting each item ➞ Page 77 to 84

Setting the Volume Related to

the Guidance and Phone

The sound volume for the navigation can be set.

You can separately set the volume of the route

guidance and the beep sound.

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Volume].

2Touch [+] or [–] to set their volume.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

Guidance

This setting controls the guidance volume of

navigation.

When you set this to , a guidance is out-

put. When you set this to , no guidance is

output.

Beep

This setting controls the beep tone volume of

navigation.

Phone Ringtone

This setting controls the incoming ring tone

volume.

Phone Voice

This setting controls the incoming voice vol-

ume.

❒The Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice

adjustments are related to the mobile

phone featuring Bluetooth technology. No

adjustment is needed when the mobile

phone featuring Bluetooth technology is

not connected.

❒Volume of the audio source is adjusted by

the VOL (8/2) button of the navigation

system.

3To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Customising the Regional Set-

tings

Changing the language for navi-

gation guidance and menu

You can select the language to be used for the

navigation function. (Once you change the lan-

guage, the system restarts.)

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Regional Settings].

2Touch [Language].

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 77 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 9Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions NAVI

3Touch the language which you want to

use.

Once you change the language, the system

restarts.

❒Touching [Back] returns you to the previ-

ous display.

Setting the time difference

Adjusts the systems clock. The time difference

(+, –) between the time originally set in your navi-

gation system is set here.

You can also select summer time On/Off.

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Regional Settings].

2Touch [Time].

To set the time difference, touch [

] or [

–

The time difference between the time origi-

nally set in the navigation system (Central

European Time) and the current location of

your vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the

time difference. Touching [+] or [–] changes

the time difference display in one-hour incre-

ments.

The time difference can be set from +3 to –3

hours.

4If necessary, set to summer time.

Summer time is off by default. Touch

[Summer Time] to change the time if you are

in the summer time period. This turns the dis-

play below summer time [On].

5To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Customising the keyboard lay-

out

You can select the type of keyboard to be used for

inputting characters.

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Regional Settings].

2Touch [Keyboard] to select the layout

which you want to use.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

QWERTY (default):

QWERTZ:

ABC:

Time difference

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 78 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

NAVI Chapter 9 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

AZERTY:

Changing the unit between km

and miles

This setting controls the unit of distance and

speed displayed on your navigation system.

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Regional Settings].

2Touch [km / mile] to change the setting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

km (default):

Show distance in kilometres.

mile:

Show distance in miles.

Mile&Yard:

Show distance in miles and yards.

Changing the virtual speed of

vehicle

When calculating expected time of arrival and the

number of hours to the destination, set the aver-

age speed for the motorway or ordinary roads

using [+] and [–].

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Regional Settings].

2Touch [Average Speed].

3Touch [+] or [–] to set their speed.

❒The estimated time of arrival is not neces-

sarily estimated based on this speed value.

Checking the Setting Related

with Hardware

The hardware status, including the driving status

of a vehicle, positioning status by satellite, learn-

ing status of the 3D sensor, and cable connection

status etc., can be checked.

Checking the connections of

leads and installation positions

Check that leads are properly connected between

the navigation system and the vehicle. Please

also check whether they are connected in the

correct positions.

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Hardware].

2Touch [Connection Status].

The Connection Status screen appears.

(1) Speed Pulse

The Speed Pulse value detected by the naviga-

tion system is shown. [0] is shown while the

vehicle is stationary.

(2) GPS Antenna

Indicates the connection status of the GPS

aerial, the reception sensitivity, and from how

many satellites the signal is received. If the

signal is received correctly, [OK] is displayed.

If reception is poor, [NOK] appears. In such

case, please change the installation position

of the GPS aerial.

(3) Phone Connection Status

Indicates the connection status of the Blue-

tooth unit and the signal strength of link-up

between the Bluetooth unit and the mobile

phone. If the connection of Bluetooth unit is

correctly, [OK] is displayed. [NOK] appears

when the Bluetooth unit is not connected or

incorrectly connected.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 79 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 9Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions NAVI

(4) Installation Position

The installation position of the navigation sys-

tem is shown. That indicates whether the

installation position of the navigation system

is correct or not. If installed correctly, [OK]

appears. When the navigation system is

installed at an extreme angle exceeding the

limitation of the installing angle, [Incorrect

angle] will be displayed. When the angle of

the navigation system has been changed,

[Excessive vibration] will be displayed.

(5) Handbrake

When the handbrake is applied, [On] is dis-

played. When the handbrake is released, [Off]

is displayed.

(6) Power Voltage

The power voltage (reference value) provided

from the vehicle battery to the navigation sys-

tem is shown. If the voltage goes out of the

range from 11 to 15V, check that power cable

connection is correct.

(7) Illumination

When the headlights or small lamps of a vehi-

cle are on, [On] is displayed. Small lamps of a

vehicle are off, [Off] is displayed. (If the

orange/ white lead is not connected, [Off]

appears.)

(8) Back Signal

When the gear lever is shifted to “R”, the sig-

nal switches to [High] or [Low]. (Either of

these is displayed depending on the vehicle.)

Checking sensor learning status

and driving status

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Hardware].

2Touch [3D Calibration Status].

The 3D Calibration Status screen appears.

(1) Distance

Driving distance is indicated.

(2) Speed Pulse

Total number of speed pulses is indicated.

(3) Learning Status

Current driving mode is indicated.

(4) Degree of learning

Sensor learning situations of distance

(Distance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn

(Left Turn), and 3D detection (3D Detection)

are indicated by the length of bars.

❒When tyres have been changed or chains

fitted, turning on the Speed Pulse allows

the system detects the fact that the tyre

diameter has changed, and automatically

replaces the value for calculating distance.

❒If the ND-PG1 is connected, the distance

calculation value cannot be replaced auto-

matically.

(5) Speed

Speed detected by the navigation system is

indicated. (This indication may be different

from the actual speed of your vehicle, so

please do not use this instead of the speedom-

eter of your vehicle.)

(6) Acceleration or deceleration/Rota-

tional speed

Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your

vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed

when your vehicle turns to left or right is

shown.

(7) Inclination

Degree of slope of the street is indicated.

(4)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(5)

(6)

(7)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 80 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

NAVI Chapter 9 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

To clear values...

If you want to delete the learned results stored in

[Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Sta-

tus], touch the relevant result, then touch [Yes].

❒If you select [Learning Status], you can

select [Reset All] or [Reset Distance

Study]. To clear all learning statuses, touch

[Reset All]. To clear only the Distance study,

touch [Reset Distance Study].

❒Touch [Reset All] for the following cases:

• When you changed the installation position

of the navigation system

• When you changed the installation angle of

the navigation system

• When you moved the navigation system to

another vehicle

❒When the distance accuracy is low, touch

[Reset Distance Study].

❒Touching [Reset All] returns the installation

angle setting also to the default or factory set-

ting. Reconfigure the setting.

➲“Correcting the installation angle” ➞ Page 81

❒The navigation system can automatically use

its sensor memory based on the outer dimen-

sions of the tyres.

Correcting the installation angle

You can correct the installation angle of the navi-

gation system. Correcting the installation angle

improves the accuracy of sensor learning, even if

the unit is not facing centre. Select the orienta-

tion of the LCD panel from the left, centre, and

right.

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Hardware].

2Touch [Installation Angle Setup].

3Check the direction the LCD panel faces,

and touch the corresponding item.

Left:

Select this when the angle is 5° or more to the

left from the centre.

Centre (default):

Select this when the angle is less than 5° to

the left, and less than 5° to the right from the

centre.

Right:

Select this when the angle is 5° or more to the

right from the centre.

❒If the [Learning Status] in the [3D Cali-

bration Status] is [Simple Hybrid], the

installation angle can be corrected.

Checking the device and version

information

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Hardware].

2Touch [Service Info Screen].

3Check the device and version information.

Checking the hard disk informa-

tion

You can check the volume of the hard disk, cur-

rent used space and remaining space.

❒The hard disk space (%) means a free space of

the music library. In some cases, even when

about 10% of free space is left, no more music

track may be recorded due to system restric-

tion.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 81 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 9Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions NAVI

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Hardware].

2Touch [Hard Disk Info].

Registering the Home Location

and Favourite Location

You can register one home location and one

favourite location. You can change the registered

information later. You might find it useful to regis-

ter your workplace or a relative’s home as your

favourite location.

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Defined Locations].

2Touch [Go to].

When registering your home location, touch

[Home].

3Search for a location to register.

You can select a method of location search.

➲Address Search ➞ Page 20

➲Information on searching locations to reg-

ister ➞ Page 45 to 50

❒If you select [Map Search], move the

scroll cursor to the place you want to set

and touch [OK].

4Point the scroll cursor to the location you

want to register and touch [OK].

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

➲“Editing the entry in “Address Book”” ➞

Page 55

5Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

Changing the Background Pic-

ture

In the menu operation screen, you can customise

a picture for the background. Some pictures are

already stored in the hard disk drive, and you can

also import JPEG format pictures, such as a pic-

ture on your digital camera by using CD-R(-RW).

If you burn the pictures into a CD-R (-RW) by your

PC and insert that to the navigation system, you

can use them as background pictures.

The following two types of background pictures

can be changed:

•Navigation Background: Background pic-

ture of navigation menu screen.

•AV Background: Background picture during

the operation of audio source screen.

Here, a method for changing the background pic-

ture is described with an example of loading a

picture stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the naviga-

tion system as the background picture.

1Check that no disc is inserted, and insert

your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading slot.

2Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Background Picture Setting].

The picture selected for each screen is indi-

cated on the right side of [Navigation Back-

ground] and [AV Background] items.

Hard disk space (%)

Be sure to read “Limitations for import the pic-

ture” before creating the CD-R (-RW).

➲“Limitations for import the picture” ➞

Page 83

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 82 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

NAVI Chapter 9 Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

3Touch [Navigation Background] or [AV

Background].

4Touch [Import from Disc].

The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (-

RW) is displayed.

On this screen, you can select the following

item:

Back to Original:

The picture originally used when the system

was purchased is selected.

❒Touching other than [Import from Disc]

allows you to select a background image

stored on the hard disk drive.

5Touch a picture you want to set.

6Touch [OK].

If you touch [OK], the background image

starts changing. After a short while, the con-

firmation screen appears.

❒If you want to change to another picture,

touch [Back] to return to Step 4.

❒When the picture starts to change, do not

turn off the vehicle engine until the mes-

sage appears to indicate that the picture

has finished changing.

Limitations for import the picture

❒You cannot use a CD-R (-RW) containing MP3

files or the Audio data part (CD-DA part) for

importing pictures.

❒When storing pictures on a CD-R (-RW), cre-

ate a folder named “Pictures” in the CD-R (-

RW), and store the picture files in this folder.

(Up to 200 picture files can be used in total

including pictures are already stored in the

hard disk drive and pictures in the CD-R (-

RW).)

❒When you burn a CD-R (-RW), limit the

number of folder hierarchy levels to eight.

❒You can only use a CD-R (-RW) finalised with

single-session for importing pictures.

❒Only JPEG format (“.jpg” or “.JPG”) pictures

can be used. Progressive format JPEG pic-

tures cannot be used.

❒You can only use standard characters (alpha-

bets of both cases: A-Z, a-z) and numbers (0-9)

for the file name (international (accented)

characters cannot be used).

❒Pictures up to a maximum of 2 592 x 1 944 pix-

els can be used. We cannot guarantee proper

operation for a picture bigger than this size.

When you burn a CD-R (-RW), make sure the

total data size of the CD-R (-RW) is greater than

100MB by storing dummy data or the like. If

not, the disc may not be recognised with the

built-in DVD drive.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 83 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 9Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions NAVI

Using the Demonstration Guid-

ance

This is a demonstration function for shops. After

a route is set, the simulation of the route guid-

ance to a destination is automatically displayed.

Normally, set this to [Off].

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu.

2Touch [Demo Mode] to change the set-

ting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

On:

Repeat demo drive.

Off (default):

Demo Mode is set off.

Correcting the Current Location

Touch the screen to adjust the current position

and direction of the vehicle displayed on the map.

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Modify Current Location].

2Scroll the position where you want to set,

then touch [OK].

3Touch the arrow key on the screen to set

the direction, then touch [OK].

Restoring the Default Setting

Reset various settings registered to the naviga-

tion system and restores to the default or factory

settings.

1Touch [Settings] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Restore Factory Settings].

2Touch [Yes] to clear the current setting.

❒Touch [No] to cancel clear the current set-

ting.

➲“Returning the Navigation System to the

Default or Factory Settings” ➞ Page 159

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 84 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

AV Chapter 10 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

Chapter 10

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

You can play or use the following sources with

the navigation system.

•DVD-Video

•CD

•MP3 disc

•Radio (FM)

•Radio (AM)

•Music Library

➲About the music library ➞ Chapter 11

This chapter describes how to use the audio

source and the basic operation of the audio

source.

Basic Operation

Switching the Audio operation

screen

1Press the AV button to switch Audio oper-

ation screen.

(1) Touch panel keys

❒Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel keys.

If you touch the screen, the touch panel

keys are displayed again.

Selecting a source

1Press the AV button to switch Audio oper-

ation screen.

2Touch the source icon to select the

desired source.

❒You can also press the AV button to switch

the source.

Press the AV button repeatedly to switch

between the following sources:

[CD/ROM (MP3)/DVD] (built-in DVD drive) –

[LIBRARY] (Music library) – [FM] (FM tuner)

– [AM] (AM tuner) – [iPod] (iPod) – [M-CD]

(multi-CD) – [TV] (television) – [AV INPUT]

(video input) – [AUX] (Auxiliary equipment) –

[EXT 1] (external unit 1) – [EXT 2] (external

unit 2)

❒Touch [OFF] to turn the source off.

❒In the following cases, the sound source can-

not to be used:

– When a unit corresponding to each source

is not connected to the navigation system.

– When no disc is set in the navigation sys-

tem.

– When no magazine is set in the multi-CD

player.

(1)

Source icon

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 85 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

–When [AUX Input] (auxiliary input) is set to

[Off].

–When [AV Input] (video input) is not set to

[Video].

❒The term “external unit” refers to future Pio-

neer devices that are not currently planned

for, or although devices are not fully control-

led by this navigation system, devices enable

control of basic functions. Two external units

can be controlled by this navigation system.

When two external units are connected, the

navigation system allocates them to external

unit 1 or external unit 2.

❒When the [Auto ANT] mode is set to

[Radio], the vehicle’s aerial can be stowed by

following the instructions below.

– Change the source from radio (AM or FM)

to another source.

– Turn the source off.

– Turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF).

If the [Auto ANT] mode is set to [Power], the

vehicle’s aerial can be stowed only when the

ACC is set to “OFF”.

➲[Auto ANT] ➞ Page 138

About Steering Remote Control

❒If you operate using the “CD-SR1” Steering

Remote Control (sold separately), the follow-

ing buttons can be used for operation:

PHONE MENU button

Switches to Phone menu when Bluetooth unit is

connected.

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button

Press to accept the call when there is an incom-

ing call.

In other situation, press to start the voice opera-

tion.

VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button

Press to reject a call when there is an incoming

call.

Press to hang up the phone during talking on the

phone.

In voice operation, return to the previous screen.

82 button:

Same function as P.LIST (8/2) button.

46 button:

Same function as TRK (4/6) button.

+, – button:

Same function as VOL (2/8) button.

BAND button:

Same function as [Band] touch key.

SOURCE button:

Same function as AV button.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 86 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

How to see the audio operation screen and how to display the Audio

Settings menu

(1) Information plate

Displays the information (e.g. track title, etc.) about the source being played.

(2) Touch panel keys

Touch to operate the source being played.

(3) Detailed information

Displays the detailed information about the source being played.

(4) AV Settings key

Displays the AV Settings menu.

(5) Hide key

Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel keys and detailed information. If you touch the screen, they

are displayed again.

(6) Audio Settings tab

Switches the setting items to those for Audio Settings.

(7) System Settings tab

Switches the setting items to those for System Settings.

(8) Setting Items

➲Customising the Audio Setting Related with Audio Visual ➞ Chapter 14

Touch

Normal screen (e.g. CD)

(1)

(3) (4) (5)

(2)

(8)

(7)

(8)

(6)

Touch

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 87 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

Operating the Music CD

You can play a normal music CD using the built-

in DVD drive of the navigation unit. This section

describes that operations.

Selecting [CD] as the source

1Press the OPEN CLOSE button and insert

a disc you want to play to disc loading

slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

❒If the disc is already set, touch the source

icon and then touch [CD].

➲For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

❒When being read in, Checking disc is dis-

played.

About auto hard disk recording

Navigation system can record the tracks of music

CD into the hard disk drive.

In default setting, the system starts recording

automatically when the unrecorded music CD is

inserted.

If you want to cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

➲Setting the hard disk recording mode ➞

Page 138

➲“Music Library Recording” ➞ Page 105

➲“Music Library Play” ➞ Page 108

❒Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc” in

the Hardware Manual for more cautions

about handling each media.

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Disc title indicator

Shows the disc title currently playing. (when

available.)

(3) Playback method indicator

Shows which playback method has been

selected.

(4) Track indicator

Shows the track number currently playing.

(5) Track title indicator

Shows the track title currently playing. (when

available.)

(6) Artist name indicator

Shows the artist name currently playing. (when

available.)

(7) Play time indicator

Shows the playback time of the current track.

(8) Track list

Shows tracks of the CD currently playing.

Title display

Music recognition technology and related data

are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the

industry standard in music recognition technol-

ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-

mation visit www.gracenote.com.

❒A title information will be displayed when the

information is found in the Gracenote® Data-

base on the built-in hard disk drive.

If you insert the CD-TEXT disc*, the system pri-

oritised a title information encoded in CD-

TEXT disc.

*: Some discs have text information encoded on

the disc during manufacture. These discs may

contain such information as the CD title, track

Stop

(8)

(3)

(5)(1) (2)

(6)

(7)

(4)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 88 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

title, artist’s name and are called CD TEXT

discs.

❒When multiple options of title information is

find or no title information exists, [–] is dis-

played.

❒The title information displayed on the CD play-

back screen and the recording screen is syn-

chronized with the one edited in the music

library. Once you edit the title information in

the music library, the title displayed on each

screen will change accordingly.

➲“Editing a playlist or tracks” ➞ Page 112

❒The maximum number of characters are 32

characters. But the navigation system incor-

porates the proportional font. Therefore, the

number of the characters which you can dis-

play varies according to which of each charac-

ter.

❒If the built-in DVD drive does not operate prop-

erly, an error message may be displayed.

➲Error messages ➞ Page 176

Touch key operation

Touch keys

(1) Selecting a desired track from the list

Touch a desired track to play.

(2) Playback and Pause

Touching ; switches between “playback” and

“pause”.

(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-

ward

Touching 9 skips to the start of the next track.

Touching 7 once skips to the start of the cur-

rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-

ous track.

Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward

Keep touching 7 or 9 to perform fast rewind

or forward.

❒You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (4/6) button.

❒Fast rewind is cancelled when it reaches the

beginning of the first track on the disc.

(4) Using to stop playback

When you stop playback by touching (, that track

number on the disc is memorised enabling play-

back from that track when you play the disc

again.

❒To play the disc again, touch ;.

(5) Repeat the current track

Each touch of turn the repeat play on or off.

[Track Repeat] is displayed on the playback

method indicator during the track repeat.

❒If you perform track search or fast forward or

rewind, repeat play is automatically cancelled.

(6) Playing tracks in a random order

Touching turns the random play on or off.

(7) Scanning tracks of a CD

Touching turns the scan play on or off.

Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of

each track on the CD. When you find the desired

track touch to turn scan play off.

❒After scanning of a CD is finished, normal

playback of the tracks will begin again.

(3) (3)

(2)

(4)

(7)(6)(5)

(1)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 89 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

Operating the CD-ROM (MP3 disc)

You can play a MP3 disc using the built-in DVD

drive of the navigation unit. This section

describes that operations.

Selecting [ROM] as the source

1Press the OPEN CLOSE button and insert

a disc you want to play to disc loading

slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

❒If the disc is already set, touch the source

icon and then touch [ROM].

➲For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

❒When being read in, Checking disc is dis-

played.

❒Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc” in

the Hardware Manual for more cautions

about handling each media.

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Playback method indicator

Shows which playback method has been

selected.

(3) Folder indicator

Shows the folder number and folder name cur-

rently playing. When ID3 tag has been encoded

on the file, the disc title will be shown instead of

the folder name.

(4) Track indicator

Shows the track number and file name of the

track currently playing. When ID3 tag has been

encoded on the file, the track title will be shown

instead of the file name.

(5) Artist name indicator

Shows the artist name currently playing only

when ID3 tag has been encoded on the MP3 file.

(6) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

(7) Folder and track list

Shows contents of the folder currently playing or

temporarily displayed.

(8) Bit rate

Shows bit rate of the file currently playing.

Touch key operation

Touch keys

(1) Selecting tracks from the list or viewing

contents of the folders

The list lets you see the list of track titles or folder

names on a disc. If you touch a folder on the list,

you can view its contents. If you touch a track on

the list, you can play the selected track.

❒Touching or switches to the next or previous

page in the list.

❒If the selected folder does not contain any

track which can be played, the track list is not

displayed.

(2) Playback and Pause

Touching ; switches between "playback" and

"pause".

(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-

ward

Touching 9 skips to the start of the next track.

Touching 7 once skips to the start of the cur-

rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-

ous track.

Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward

Keep touching 7 or 9 to perform fast rewind

or forward.

(1) (3) (4)(5)(8) (2)

(6)

(7)

(3) (6) (5)

(2)

(4)

(9)(8)(7)

(1)

(3)

(10)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 90 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

❒You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (4/6) button.

❒fast rewind is cancelled when it reaches the

beginning of the first track on the disc.

❒In the case of MP3, there is no sound on fast

rewind or forward.

(4) Using to stop playback

When you stop playback by touching (, that track

number on the disc is memorised enabling play-

back from that track when you play the disc

again.

❒To play the disc again, touch ;.

(5) Selecting upper folder

Touching to move the upper folder and

playback the first track on that folder. If the folder

contain no MP3 files, the contents of that folder is

shown.

❒If the current folder is the ROOT folder,

can not be used.

(6) Switching mode between MP3 and music

CD (CD-DA) part

When playing discs with MP3 files and audio

data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-

MODE CDs, both types can be played only by

switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA.

Touching [Media] switches between CD-DA part

and MP3 part.

(7) Displaying text information on MP3 disc

Text information recorded on a MP3 disc can be

displayed.

The next piece of information is displayed.

•Disc Title (disc title)*

•Track Title (track title)*

•Folder Title (folder name)

•File Name (file name)

•Artist Name (artist name)*

•Genre (genre)*

•Release Year (release year)*

❒The information marked with an asterisk (*) is

displayed only when ID3 tag has been

encoded on MP3 files on the disc. If specific

information of the ID3 tag has not been

encoded on MP3 files on disc, the correspond

item may be blank.

(8) Repeating play

Each touch of changes the settings as fol-

lows:

•Track Repeat – Repeat just the current track

•Folder Repeat – Repeat the folder currently

playing

❒If you select another track or perform fast for-

ward/rewind during Track Repeat, the

repeat play is cancelled.

❒If you select another folder or perform fast for-

ward/rewind during Folder Repeat, the

repeat play is cancelled. (You can perform

track search within that folder with Folder

repeat.)

❒When Folder Repeat is selected, it is not

possible to play back a subfolder of that

folder.

(9) Playing tracks in random order

Touching switches between on and off the

tracks are randomly played within selected repeat

range.

(10) Scanning folders and tracks

Touching turns the scan play on or off.

Scan play will be performed for the selected

repeat range.

❒In default, the beginning of the first track of

each folder will be played for about 10 sec-

onds. When [Folder Repeat] is selected for

repeat play, the beginning of each track in the

selected folder will play for about 10 seconds.

When you find the desired track, touch

to turn scan play off.

❒After track or folder scanning is finished, nor-

mal playback of the tracks will begin again.

Notes on playing MP3 disc

❒When playing discs with MP3 files and audio

data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-

MODE CDs, both types can be played only by

switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA.

When playing back the CD-DA part, the opera-

tion is the same as for normal music CDs.

Likewise, when playing back the MP3 part, the

operation is the same as for MP3. When you

operate it, refer to the instruction for each

media.

❒If you have switched between playback of MP3

files and audio data (CD-DA), playback starts

at the first track on the disc.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 91 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

❒Playback is carried out in order of file number.

Folders are skipped if they contain no MP3

files. (For example, if folder 01 (ROOT) con-

tains no MP3 files, playback commences with

folder 02.)

❒When playing back files recorded as VBR (var-

iable bit rate) files, the play time will not be

correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse

operations are used.

❒If you are using a folder that does not contain

an MP3 file, the folder itself will display but

you will not be able to see or play any files in

that folder.

❒The maximum number of characters are 32

characters including extension (.mp3). But

the navigation system incorporates the pro-

portional font. Therefore, the number of the

characters which you can display varies

according to which of each character.

❒If the built-in DVD drive does not operate prop-

erly, an error message may be displayed.

➲Error messages ➞ Page 176

❒Playing MP3 file on the DVD-R (-RW) is not

supported.

Operating the DVD

• For safety reasons, “Video image” cannot

be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.

To view “Video image”, you must stop in a

safe place and put on the handbrake

before setting your route (see page 14

Interlock for details).

You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in DVD

drive of the navigation system. This section

describes operations for DVD-Video.

Selecting [DVD] as the source

1Press the OPEN CLOSE button and insert

a disc you want to play to disc loading

slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

❒If the disc is already set, touch the source

icon and then touch [DVD].

➲For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

❒Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc”

and “Playable discs” in the Hardware Manual

for more cautions about handling DVD-Video.

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Sound output indicator

Shows which sound output setting has been

selected.

(3) Repeat range indicator

Shows which repeat range has been selected.

(1) (4)(6) (5) (7) (3) (8)

(9)

(2)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 92 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

(4) Title number indicator

Shows the title number currently playing.

(5) Subtitle language indicator

Shows what subtitle language has been selected.

(6) Chapter number indicator

Shows the chapter currently playing.

(7) Audio language indicator

Shows what audio language have been selected.

(8) Viewing angle indicator

Shows what viewing angle has been selected.

(9) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

chapter.

Touch key operation

Playback screen (page1)

Playback screen (page2)

Menu screen

❒With some discs, the icon may be dis-

played, that operation is not valid.

(1) Playback and Pause

Touching ; switches between “playback” and

"pause".

(2) Touch: Skip the chapter forward or back-

ward

Touching 9 skips to the start of the next chap-

ter. Touching 7 once skips to the start of the

current chapter. Touching again will skip to the

previous chapter.

Touch and hold: fast rewind or forward

Keep touching 7 or 9 to perform fast rewind

or forward. If you keep touching 7 or 9 for

five seconds, the icon 1 or 3 changes into

or . When this happens, fast rewind/ fast

forward continues even if you release 7 or 9.

To resume playback at a desired point, touch

❒You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (4/6) button.

(3) Using to stop playback

(4) Displaying the DVD menu

You can display the menu by touching [Menu] or

[Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touching

either of these keys again lets you start playback

from the location selected from the menu. For

details, refer to the instructions provided with the

disc.

(5) Displaying the DVD menu keypad

(6) Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-

motion playback)

Touch and hold to start slow-motion playback.

Touching this during playback pauses the image

and each touch forwards a frame.

To return to normal playback, touch ;.

❒With some discs, images may be unclear dur-

ing frame-by-frame playback or slow motion

playback.

❒There is no sound during slow motion play-

back.

❒Reverse slow motion playback is not possible.

(7) Switching next page of touch keys

(8) Repeating play

Each touch of the changes the settings as

follows:

•Chapter Repeat – Repeat just the current

chapter

•Title Repeat – Repeat just the current title

(2) (4)

(3)

(5)(6)

(2)

(7)

(1)

(8)

(9)

(11)

(12)

(14)

(13)(10)

(16)

(15)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 93 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

❒If you perform chapter (title) search, fast for-

ward/rewind, or slow motion playback, the

repeat play range changes to off.

(9) Changing the subtitle language (Multi-

subtitle)

Each time you touch [Subtitle] switches

between subtitle language.

(10) Changing the viewing angle (Multi-

angle)

Each time you touch [Angle] switches between

viewing angle.

❒During playback of a scene shot from multiple

angles, the angle icon is displayed. Turn

angle icon display on or off using “DVD-V

Setup” menu.

➲Setting angle icon ➞ Page 134

(11) Changing audio language and audio sys-

tems (Multi-audio)

Each time you touch [Audio] switches between

audio language and audio system.

❒Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch

indicate the audio system recorded on the

DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may

not be with the same audio system as that

indicated.

(12) Specifying the chapter you want to play

back or time to start playback by entering a

number

➲“Searching for a desired scene, starting play-

back from a specified time” ➞ Page 94

(13) The operation (such as resuming) stored

in the disc will be performed

When using a DVD that has a point recorded that

indicates where to return to, the DVD returns to

the specified point and begins play back from

that point.

(14) Switching previous page of touch keys

(15) Selecting the DVD menu item

(16) Using to decide the item

When you select a certain video item, play-

back starts from the selected item. When you

select the item with submenu, next menu

screen will appear.

❒The way to display the menu differs

depending on the disc. For details, refer to

the instructions provided with disc.

Searching for a desired scene,

starting playback from a speci-

fied time

You can search for a desired scene by specifying

a title or a chapter, and the time.

❒Chapter search and time search are not possi-

ble when disc playback has been stopped.

1Touch [10Key Search] and then touch

[Title] (title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time]

(time).

2Touch the keys to input the desired

number.

For titles, chapters

• To select 3, touch [3].

• To select 10, touch [1] and [0] in order.

• To select 23, touch [2] and [3] in order.

For time (time search)

• To select 21 minutes 03 seconds, touch [2],

[1], [Min], and [3], [Sec] in order.

• To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],

[1], [Min] in order.

❒To cancel the input numbers, touch

[Clear].

3While the input number is displayed,

touch [Enter].

This starts playback from the selected scene.

❒With discs featuring a menu, you can also

touch [Menu] or [Top Menu] and then

make selections from the displayed menu.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 94 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

Entering the numerical com-

mands

You can use this function when you need to enter

a numerical command during DVD playback.

1Touch [10Key Search] and then touch

[10key Mode] (10key mode).

2Touch 0 – 9 to input the desired number.

3While the input number is displayed,

touch [Enter].

Operating the Radio (FM)

You can listen to the radio by using the navigation

system. This section describes operations for

Radio (FM).

Selecting [FM] as the source

1Touch the source icon and touch [FM].

➲For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Band indicator

Shows which band the radio is tuned to FM1 to

FM3.

(3) PTY indicator

Shows the programme type of current station

(when available).

(4) TRFC indicator*

Shows the status of traffic announcement.

(5) NEWS indicator*

Shows the status of news programme.

(6) TEXT indicator

Shows when the radio text is received.

(7) STEREO indicator

Shows that the frequency selected is being

broadcast in stereo.

(8) LOCAL indicator

Shows when local seek tuning is on.

(9) Preset number indicator

Shows what preset has been selected.

(10) Programme service name indicator

Shows the programme service name (station

name) of current station. If the programme ser-

(1) (2) (6) (7)

(8)

(11)

(4) (5)

(10)

(3)

(9)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 95 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

vice name (station name) cannot be received, the

frequency will be displayed instead.

(11) Preset list display

Shows the name of broadcast programme. If the

programme service name (station name) cannot

be received, the frequency will be displayed

instead.

❒About the detailed status of (*) marked item,

refer to “About interruption Icon status”.

➲“About interruption Icon status (e.g. TRFC

icon)” ➞ Page 99

Touch key operation

1Touch the source icon and then touch

[FM] to select the radio (FM).

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys (page1)

Touch keys (page2)

(1) Touch: Recalling the preset station

Touch and hold: Storing broadcast station

You can register the frequency currently being

received to the preset list. You can easily store up

to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with

the touch of a key.

❒Touch to recall the preset frequency.

❒Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three FM

bands can be stored in memory.

(2) Select a FM band

Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired FM

band is displayed, FM 1, FM 2 or FM 3.

❒This function is convenient to prepare differ-

ent preset list for each band.

(3) Touch: Perform manual tuning

To perform manual tuning, touch or

briefly. The frequencies move up or

down step by step.

Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning

To perform seek tuning, keep touching

or for about one second and release. The

tuner will scan the channels until a broadcast

strong enough for good reception is found.

❒You can cancel seek tuning by touching either

or briefly.

❒If you keep touching or , you

can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning

starts as soon as you release the keys.

❒You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (4/6) button.

(4) Storing the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies

➲“Storing the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies” ➞ Page 97

(5) Tuning in strong signals

➲“Tuning in strong signals” ➞ Page 97

(6) Displaying and storing the radio text

➲“Using radio text” ➞ Page 97

(7) Searching for an RDS station by PTY

information

➲“Searching for an RDS station by PTY informa-

tion” ➞ Page 98

(8) Switching next page of touch keys

(9) Turning TA function on or off

➲“Receiving traffic announcements” ➞ Page 98

(10) Turning NEWS function on or off

➲“Using news programme interruption” ➞

Page 98

(11) Selecting alternative frequencies

➲“Selecting alternative frequencies (AF)” ➞

Page 99

(2)

(4)

(7)

(6)(5)

(1) (3)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(12)

(11)

(13)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 96 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

(12) Limiting stations to regional program-

ming

➲“Limiting stations to regional programming”

➞ Page 100

(13) Switching previous page of touch keys

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies

“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you automati-

cally store the six strongest broadcast frequen-

cies under preset tuning keys [P1] – [P6] and

once stored there you can tune in to those fre-

quencies with a touch of the key.

1Touch and hold [BSM].

BSM starts. The six strongest broadcast fre-

quencies will be stored under preset tuning

keys [P1] – [P6] in order of their signal

strength.

❒To cancel the storage process, touch

[Cancel].

❒Storing broadcast frequencies with “BSM”

may replace broadcast frequencies you

have saved using [P1] – [P6].

Tuning in strong signals

Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those

radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for

good reception.

1Touch [Local].

2Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.

❒To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].

3Touch [4] or [6] to set the sensitivity.

There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.

Level: 1 – 2 – 3 – 4

The level “4” setting allows reception of only

the strongest stations, while lower settings let

you receive weaker stations.

Using radio text

This tuner can display radio text data transmitted

by RDS stations, such as station information, the

name of the currently broadcast song and the

name of the artist.

❒The tuner automatically memorises the three

latest radio text broadcasts received, replac-

ing text from the least recent reception with

new text when it is received.

Displaying radio text

You can display the currently received radio text

and the three most recent radio text.

1Touch to display radio text.

Radio text for the currently broadcasting sta-

tion is displayed.

❒When no radio text is received, “No Text”

is displayed.

2Touch or .

Touching the keys switches the text contents

from the current radio text to the recent three

radio text.

❒If there is no radio text data in memory the

display will not change.

❒If you touch [Current Radio Text], the

screen returns to the current radio text.

Storing and recalling radio text

You can store data from up to six radio text trans-

missions at touch keys 1 – 6.

1Display the radio text you want to store in

memory.

➲“Displaying radio text” ➞ Page 97

2Press and hold any of the keys 1 – 6 to

store the displayed radio text.

The selected radio text is stored in memory.

The next time you press the same keys 1 – 6 in

the radio text display, the stored text is

recalled from memory.

❒If the radio text data already stored under

memory 1 – 6, the radio text memorized

afterward will overwrite the existing one.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 97 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

Searching for an RDS station by

PTY information

You can search for general types of broadcasting

programmes.

➲“PTY list” ➞ Page 101

1Touch [PTY].

2Touch or to select a

desired programme type.

There are four programme types:

[NEWS&INF] – [POPULAR] – [CLASSIC] –

[OTHERS]

3Touch [Search] to begin the search.

The tuner searches for a station broadcasting

that programme type.

To cancel the search, touch [Stop].

❒The programme of some stations may dif-

fer from that indicated by the transmitted

PTY.

❒If no station is broadcasting the type of

programme you searched for, [Not

Found] is displayed and then the tuner

returns to the original station.

Receiving traffic announce-

ments

TA (traffic announcement standby) lets you

receive traffic announcements automatically, no

matter what source you are listening to. TA can

be activated for both a TP station (a station that

broadcasts traffic information) or another

enhanced network’s TP station (a station carrying

information which cross-references TP stations).

1Tune in a TP or enhanced other network’s

TP station.

When you are tuned into a TP or enhanced

other network’s TP station the indica-

tor will light.

2Press the TA/NEWS button to turn traffic

announcement standby on.

appears in the display. The tuner will

standby for traffic announcements.

If you turned TA function on while tuned in to

neither a TP nor another enhanced network’s

TP station, the indicator lights.

❒To turn traffic announcements standby off,

press the TA/NEWS button again.

❒You can also turn on or off TA function by

touching [TA] on the screen.

3Use the VOL (2/8) button to adjust the TA

volume when a traffic announcement

begins.

The newly set volume is stored in memory and

recalled for subsequent traffic announce-

ments.

4Press the TA/NEWS button while a traffic

announcement is being received to cancel

the announcement.

The tuner returns to the original source but

remains in standby mode until turning the

traffic announcement standby off.

❒You can also cancel the announcement by

pressing the TRK (4/6) button or the

P.LIST (8/2) button while a traffic

announcement is being received.

❒The system switches back to the original

source following traffic announcement

reception.

❒Only TP and other enhanced network’s TP

stations are tuned in during seek tuning or

BSM when TA is on.

Using news programme inter-

ruption

When a news programme is broadcast from a

PTY code news station, the navigation system can

switch from any station to the news broadcast

station. When the news programme ends, recep-

tion of the previous programme resumes.

1Press and hold the TA/NEWS button to

turn on news programme interruption.

Press the TA/NEWS button until or

appears in the display.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 98 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Chapter 10 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

2Press the TA/NEWS button during a news

programme interruption to cancel the

news programme.

❒To turn off news programme interruption,

press and hold the TA/NEWS button

again.

The tuner returns to the original source but

remains in standby mode until turning the

news programme interruption off.

❒You can also cancel the news programme

by pressing the TRK (4/6) button or the

P.LIST (8/2) button while a news pro-

gramme is being received.

❒You can also turn on or off NEWS function

by touching [NEWS] on the screen.

About interruption Icon status (e.g.

TRFC icon)

The indication of the status icon changes accord-

ing to the situation as shown below.

Selecting alternative frequen-

cies (AF)

If you are listening to a broadcast and the recep-

tion becomes weak or there are other problems,

the navigation system will automatically search

for a different station in the same network which

is broadcasting a stronger signal.

❒AF is on as a default.

1Touch (or ).

Touching the key switches the status between

on and off.

❒Only RDS stations are tuned in during seek

tuning or BSM when AF is on.

❒When you recall a preset station, the tuner

may update the preset station with a new

frequency from the station’s AF list. (This is

only available when using presets on the

FM1 or FM2 bands.) No preset number

appears on the display if the RDS data for

the station received differs from that for

the originally stored station.

❒Sound may be temporarily interrupted by

another programme during an AF fre-

quency search.

❒AF can be turned on or off independently

for each FM band.

Using PI Seek

If the navigation system fails to find a suitable

alternative frequency, or if you are listening to a

broadcast and the reception becomes weak, the

navigation system will automatically search for a

different station with the same programming.

During the search, “PI Seek” is displayed and the

output for audio source is muted. The muting is

discontinued after completion of the PI Seek,

whether or not a different station is found.

Using Auto PI Seek for preset

stations

When preset stations cannot be recalled, as

when travelling long distances, the navigation

system can be set to perform PI Seek during pre-

set recall.

❒The default setting for Auto PI Seek is off.

➲“Switching Auto PI seek” ➞ Page 139

Indicator Implication

Information interruption is ON, but

you will not receive data since there

is none.

Even if the information interruption

is turned OFF, data is still received.

(You can receive when information

interruption is turned ON.)

The information interruption is

turned ON, and currently receiving

data.

(Flash)

Information interruption is turned

ON, but reception has deteriorated,

so it is searching for another avail-

able frequency.

(No display) Information interruption is turned

OFF, and no data is being received.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 99 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

100

Chapter 10Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

Limiting stations to regional

programming

When AF is used to automatically retune frequen-

cies, the regional function limits the selection to

stations broadcasting regional programmes.

1Touch (or ).

Touching the key switches the status between

on and off.

❒Regional programming and regional net-

works are organised differently depending

on the country (i.e., they may change

according to the time, country or broad-

cast area).

❒The preset number may disappear on the

display if the tuner tunes in a regional sta-

tion which differs from the originally set

station.

❒The regional function can be turned on or

off independently for each FM band.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 100 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

101

Chapter 10 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

PTY list

General Specific Type of programme

NEWS&INF NEWS News

AFFAIRS Current affairs

INFO General information and advice

SPORT Sports

WEATHER Weather reports/meteorological information

FINANCE Stock market reports, commerce, trading, etc.

POPULAR POP MUS Popular music

ROCK MUS Contemporary modern music

EASY MUS Easy listening music

OTH MUS Non categorized music

JAZZ Jazz

COUNTRY Country music

NAT MUS National music

OLDIES Oldies music, golden oldies

FOLK MUS Folk music

CLASSICS L. CLASS Light classical music

CLASSIC Serious classical music

OTHERS EDUCATE Educational programmes

DRAMA All radio plays and serials

CULTURE National or regional culture

SCIENCE Nature, science and technology

VARIED Light entertainment

CHILDREN Children’s

SOCIAL Social affairs

RELIGION Religion affairs or services

PHONE IN Phone In

TOURING Travel programmes, not for announcements about traffic problems

LEISURE Hobbies and recreational activities

DOCUMENT Documentaries

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 101 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

102

Chapter 10Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

Operating the Radio (AM)

You can listen to the radio by using the navigation

system. This section describes operations for

Radio (AM).

Selecting [AM] as the source

1Touch the source icon and touch [AM].

➲For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

Screen configuration

Radio (AM)

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Preset number indicator

Shows what preset has been selected.

(3) Frequency indicator

Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.

(4) Preset list display

Shows the preset list.

(5) LOCAL indicator

Shows when local seek tuning is on.

(6) LW/MW indicator

Shows whether the tuner is tuned for the LW or

MW.

Touch key operation

1Touch the source icon and then touch

[AM] to select the radio (AM).

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

(1) Selecting a desired frequency from the

list

Touch to recall the preset frequency.

❒To register the frequency currently being

received to the preset list, touch and hold the

preset list.

Touch and hold: Storing broadcast stations

You can register the frequency currently being

received to the preset list. You can easily store up

to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with

the touch of a key.

❒Touch to recall the preset frequency.

❒Up to 6 stations can be stored in memory.

(2) Touch: Perform manual tuning

To perform manual tuning, touch or

briefly. The frequencies move up or

down step by step.

❒You can also perform manual tuning by press-

ing the TRK (4/6) button.

Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning

To perform seek tuning, keep touching

or for about one second and release.

The tuner will scan the channels until a broad-

cast strong enough for good reception is found.

❒You can cancel seek tuning by touching either

or briefly.

❒If you keep touching or , you

can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning

starts as soon as you release the keys.

❒You can also perform seek tuning by keep

pressing the TRK (4/6) button.

(1) (2) (3) (5)

(4)

(6)

(4)

(2)

(1) (3)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 102 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

103

Chapter 10 Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)AV

(3) Tuning in strong signals

➲“Tuning in strong signals” ➞ Page 103

(4) Storing the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies

➲“Storing the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies” ➞ Page 103

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies

BSM (best stations memory) lets you automati-

cally store the six strongest broadcast frequen-

cies under preset tuning keys P1 – P6 and once

stored there you can tune in to those frequencies

with the touch of a key.

1Touch and hold [BSM].

BSM starts. The six strongest broadcast frequen-

cies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 –

P6 in order of their signal strength.

❒To cancel the storage process, touch

[Cancel].

❒Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may

replace broadcast frequencies you have saved

using P1 – P6.

Tuning in strong signals

Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those

radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for

good reception.

1Touch [Local].

2Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.

❒To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].

3Touch 4 or 6 to set the sensitivity.

There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.

Level: 1 – 2

The level [2] setting allows reception of only

the strongest stations, while lower settings let

you receive weaker stations.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 103 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

104

Chapter 10Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio) AV

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 104 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

105

Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Music Library)AV

Chapter 11

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

You can record tracks from a music CD to the

hard disk in the navigation system. The music

library function enables you to record music CDs

on the hard disk in the navigation system and

play them back in various methods. To use the

music library, start by recording sound sources

from the CD.

Music Library Recording

When you play back a music CD that is not

recorded on the navigation system, the system

automatically begins recording that CD to the

music library. This section describes cautions

and recording procedure.

❒The music library can record up to 200 general

music CDs worth of music data. (This is just

an average number and varies depending on

the size of music data contained in the CDs.)

CD recording screen (e.g. Auto mode)

(1) Recording mode indicator

Shows the current recording mode.

➲“Setting the CD recording mode” ➞ Page 138

(2) Record progress indicator

Shows the progress of the recording. Fractions

show number of recorded tracks total number of

tracks in the CD.

(3) Record indicator

Shows the recording status. (Red) indicates

that recording is in progress. (Blue) indicates

preparing recording.

(4) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(5) Track indicator

Shows the track number and track title currently

playing.

(6) Artist name indicator

Shows the artist name currently playing.

(7) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

(8) Track list

Shows tracks of the CD.

(9) Record status of tracks

: Recorded track

(Red): Track being recorded

(Blue): Track is not recorded yet

❒Track selection operation or special playback

functions such as random play are disabled

until recording finishes. To select tracks or

perform special playback functions, touch

[Stop] to stop recording.

Title display

Music recognition technology and related data

are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the

industry standard in music recognition technol-

ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-

mation visit www.gracenote.com.

❒A title information will be displayed when the

information is found in the Gracenote® Data-

base on the built-in hard disk drive.

If you insert the CD-TEXT disc, the system pri-

oritised a title information encoded in CD-

TEXT disc.

❒When multiple options of title information is

find or no title information exists, [–] is dis-

played. A title may be displayed if you update

the title information manually after recording

has finished.

➲“Assigning another candidate for title infor-

mation” ➞ Page 116

(4) (1) (2) (6) (7)

(9) (8) (5)

(3)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 105 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

106

Chapter 11Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

❒If no title information exists in the Gracenote®

Database on the built-in hard disk drive, the

date when the track was recorded is entered

automatically. If you want to display the title

information, enter the title manually after

recording has finished.

➲Changing the title of the playlist or track ➞

Page 112

❒The title information displayed on the CD play-

back screen and the recording screen is syn-

chronized with the one edited in the music

library. If you edit the title information in the

music library, the title displayed on each

screen will change accordingly.

➲“Editing a playlist or tracks” ➞ Page 112

❒Title information can only be edited when one

or more tracks in a disc is recorded in the

music library.

❒Once you record the CD-TEXT disc, the title

information encoded in CD-TEXT disc is also

stored into the hard disc drive. (If you edit the

title information with the Music library, the

edited title will be shown.)

Recording all tracks in a CD

When you play back a CD that is not recorded, it

is automatically recorded in the music library

(hard disk drive).

❒All tracks are automatically recorded (Auto)

in the default setting.

➲“Setting the CD recording mode” ➞ Page 138

1Insert the CD that you want to record.

Recording automatically starts.

❒To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

When recording finishes, the system returns

to the normal playback screen of the CD in the

blank between current track and next track.

❒If the CD is scratched or damaged, no data

can be recorded on that part. In such a

case, the track that falls on that part may

be skipped.

Recording a CD manually

You can record only your favourite tracks in the

CD.

1[REC Mode] is set to [Manual].

➲Switching the recording mode ➞ Page 138

❒The REC Mode cannot be changed during

recording.

2Play back the track you want to record.

3Touch [REC].

The track being played is recorded.

When recording finishes, the system returns

to the normal playback screen of the CD in the

end of the track.

❒To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

Recording only the first track of

a CD

You can record only the first track of the CD. This

mode is useful when you want to record only the

first tracks from multiple CD singles (or EPs) con-

secutively.

1[REC Mode] is set to [Single].

➲Switching the recording mode ➞ Page 138

❒The REC Mode cannot be changed during

recording.

2Insert the CD you want to record.

Recording automatically stars for the first

track.

When recording finishes, the system returns

to the normal playback screen of the CD in the

end of the track.

❒To cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

Stopping CD recording

You can stop recording while recording a CD.

(Recording can resume depending on the record-

ing mode.)

1Touch [Stop].

When REC Mode is [Auto] or [Single]:

Recording is paused, and the system starts

normal CD playback. To resume recording,

touch [REC]. Recording also resumes in the

following cases:

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 106 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

107

AV Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Music Library)

– When you switch to another source, and

then return to the CD source.

– When you turn off the ignition switch of the

vehicle, and then restart the engine.

When REC Mode is [Manual]:

Recording is stopped. Touch [REC] to record

the track being played.

Notes on CD recording

❒Operations on the navigation system may take

more time during recording than normal.

❒Tracks from a CD are recorded in 4 times

speed. You can listen to that sound during

recording.

❒The data is recorded using a highly efficient

compression method, so the sound may

slightly differ from the original depending on

the sound source. Noise may be heard in

some cases, but this is not an malfunction.

❒Recording is possible only with a CD that con-

tains 44.1 kHz, 16-bit-stereo PCM digital audio

data.

❒Recording (or copying) to the music library is

not possible from recording media (such as

CD-Rs) in which a CD or other data is digitally

stored. This is due to the Serial Copy Manage-

ment System (SCMS) that was developed to

prevent second-generation or serial copies.

❒Recording to the music library is not possible

from media (such as CD-Rs) in which MP3

files are stored.

❒When you are recording a CD with no track

intervals (such as a live concert CD), if the

engine stops and the power turns off, the

sound may break in a track when the music

data is played back.

Notes for Hard disk drive

Recording equipment and copyright

Recording equipment should be used only for

lawful copying and you are advised to check care-

fully what is lawful copying in the country in

which you are making a copy. Copying of copy-

right material such as films or music is unlawful

unless permitted by a legal exception or con-

sented to by the right owners.

About writing data to the hard disk

drive at low temperature

Writing to the hard disk drive such as recording

music to the music library may be disabled when

the navigation system detects abnormally low

temperatures inside the vehicle. Functionality will

become available once the temperature inside

the vehicle returns to normal.

When recording please pay attention to

these points;

• Pioneer does not compensate for contents that

cannot be recorded or any loss of recorded

data due to a malfunction or failure of the navi-

gation system.

• The data recorded on the navigation system

cannot be used without permission from its

right holder under copyright law except for per-

sonal entertainment.

• Make sure to check the recording operation

before recording and check the recorded con-

tents after recording.

• Recording is not guaranteed for all CDs.

About the data saved or recorded by the

customer

• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-

tion system by the customer cannot be

extracted from the navigation system, and

those service cannot be accepted.

• The data saved or recorded onto this naviga-

tion system by the customer cannot be guaran-

teed during repair or service. Lost data that

was saved or recorded by the customer is not

guaranteed.

• Due to copyrights, the music data recorded

into the Music Library cannot be backed up

during repair or service.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 107 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

108

Chapter 11Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

Music Library Play

You can play back or edit the tracks recorded in

the hard disk drive in the source named music

library (LIBRARY).

Selecting [LIBRARY] as the

source

1Touch the source icon and touch

[LIBRARY].

For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

Screen configuration

Music Library (LIBRARY)

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Group name indicator

Shows the group currently playing.

(3) Playlist name indicator

Shows the playlist currently playing.

(4) Track name indicator

Shows the track currently playing.

(5) Artist name indicator

Shows the artist name currently playing.

(6) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

(7) Track list and playlist

Shows the track list or the playlist currently play-

ing or temporary displayed.

The icon on the left indicates that the item is a

“Playlist”, and the icon indicates that the item

is a “Track”.

Title display

Music recognition technology and related data

are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the

industry standard in music recognition technol-

ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-

mation visit www.gracenote.com.

❒If no title information exists in the Gracenote®

Database on the built-in hard disk drive, the

date when the track was recorded is entered

automatically. If you want to display the title

information, enter the title manually after

recording has finished.

➲“Changing the title of the playlist or track” ➞

Page 113

Relationship of groups, playlists, and

tracks

The music library is organised as follows with

three levels: groups, playlists, and tracks.

There are four types of groups:

Album group ([Albums]):

Stores the recorded track data in its original

order. One playlist is automatically created when

a CD is recorded.

Artist group ([Artists]):

Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted by art-

ist names.

Genre group ([Genres]):

Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted by gen-

res.

My Favorite group ([My Favorites]):

Stores playlists registered with your favourite

selection.

Maximum number you can register

If you try to record new one more than above, the

oldest playlist will be deleted.

(7)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Playlist Tracks for a playlist

[Albums]40099

[Artists]400400

[Genres]13400

[My Favorites]5 99

Group

Playlist

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 108 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

109

AV Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Touch key operation

Listening to a track recorded in the

Music Library

1Touch the source icon and then touch

[LIBRARY].

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

(1) Selecting a desired track from the list

Touch a desired track to play.

❒Touching or switches to the next or previ-

ous page in the list.

(2) Playback and Pause

Touching ; switches between "playback" and

"pause".

(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-

ward

Touching 9 skips to the start of the next track.

Touching 7 once skips to the start of the cur-

rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-

ous track.

Touch and hold: fast backward or forward

❒You can also perform these operations with

using the TRK (4/6) button.

(4) Viewing upper contents

Touching displays the contents of the

upper playlist or group.

❒You cannot touch on the group selec-

tion screen.

➲“Relationship of groups, playlists, and tracks”

➞ Page 108

(5) Displaying group selection screen

You can search a track from categories.

➲Search for a playlist ➞ Page 110

(6) Displaying the details information screen

Displays the information about the track or playl-

ist displayed in blue on the track list. On the

details information, you can delete the track or

edit the track information.

➲“Editing a playlist or tracks” ➞ Page 112

(7) Touch and hold: Register the track in My

Mix.

➲“Registering a track to “My Mix” playlist in one

action” ➞ Page 111

(8) Repeat play

Each touch of changes the repeat range

as follows:

•Track Repeat – Repeat just the current track

•Playlist Repeat – Repeat just the current

playlist

•No display – Repeat the currently selected

group

❒Repeat play may stop if you perform an opera-

tion that affects a track outside the repeating

range during track repeat play.

❒If you perform random play or scan play dur-

ing track repeat play, the repeating range

changes to Playlist Repeat.

(9) Playing tracks in random order

The selected tracks in the repeated range are ran-

domly played.

❒Random play may stop if you perform an oper-

ation that affects a track outside the repeating

range or perform repeat play or scan play dur-

ing track repeat play.

❒When the range of repeat play is Track

Repeat, if you perform random play, the

repeating range changes to Playlist Repeat.

(10) Scan play

Scan play will be performed for the selected

repeat range.

❒When the range of repeat play is Track

Repeat, if you perform scan play, the repeat-

ing range changes to Playlist Repeat.

(3) (5) (4)

(2)

(7)

(9)(8)(6)

(1)

(3)

(10)

Indicator Implication

[Random]

only

Tracks of all playlists in the group

are played in random order.

[Playlist

Repeat] and

[Random]

Tracks in the selected playlist are

played in random order.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 109 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

110

Chapter 11Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

❒When you find the desired track, touch

to turn scan play off.

❒After track or playlist scanning is finished,

normal playback of the tracks will begin again.

Searching a track from the playlist

Once tracks are recorded, the navigation system

categorises them in a “Group”, and several types

of playlists are automatically created. A playlist is

a list that shows the playback order of tracks.

➲“Relationship of groups, playlists, and tracks”

➞ Page 108

Searching for an album

Select the playlist formed according to albums,

and play it back.

1Touch [Search].

The group selection screen appears.

2Touch [Albums].

3Touch the album name (“Album” playlist)

you want to play back.

The first track in the selected playlist is played

back.

Searching the playlist by artist

Select the playlist formed according to artists,

and play it back.

1Touch [Search].

The group selection screen appears.

2Touch [Artists].

“Artist” playlist appears.

3Touch the artist name (“Artist” playlist)

you want to play back.

The first track in the selected playlist is played

back.

Search a playlist by genre

Select the playlist formed according to genres,

and play it back.

1Touch [Search].

The group selection screen appears.

2Touch [Genres].

“Genre” playlist appears.

3Touch the genre (“Genre” playlist) you

want to play back.

The first track in the selected playlist is played

back.

Indicator Implication

[Scan] only The beginning of the first tracks of

each playlist in the group is played

for about 10 seconds.

[Playlist

Repeat] and

[Scan]

The beginning of each track in the

selected playlist is played for

about 10 seconds.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 110 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

111

AV Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Creating a playlist with a cus-

tomised order

You can register your favourite tracks as a playl-

ist, and play them back in desired order.

[My Favorites] group has two types of playlists.

“My Mix” playlist:

You can register the track being played in one

action.

“My Favorite 1-4” playlist:

You can register tracks from the detailed screen

information.

Registering a track to “My Mix” playlist

in one action

You can register the track being played to the

favourite playlist called “My Mix”.

1Touch and hold [Memo] while playing

back the track you want to register.

The track being played is registered in “My

Mix” playlist.

1Play back the track you want to register.

2Touch , then touch [Add to My

Favorites].

3Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to [My

Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you

want to register the track.

4Touch [Yes].

The track is registered in the selected My

Favourite playlist.

Registering multiple tracks at a time

1Play back the playlist that contains the

tracks you want to register.

2Touch to display the list of playl-

ists.

3Touch , then touch [Add to My

Favorites].

The item displayed in blue is the selected play-

list.

4Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to [My

Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you

want to register the tracks.

5Touch the tracks you want to register.

When you touch a track, a tick mark appears

indicating that it is selected. To deselect it,

touch the track again.

Touch 6 to proceed to the next operation.

Select All:

Selects all tracks in the playlist.

All Off:

Cancels selection of all tracks in the playlist.

6Touch [Back].

7Touch [Yes].

The tracks are registered in the selected “My

Favorite” playlist.

❒Up to 99 tracks can be registered in one

“My Favorite” playlist.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 111 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

112

Chapter 11Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

Editing a playlist or tracks

You can edit the tracks or playlist recorded in the

Music library.

Only the playlists and tracks in the [Albums]

group and the [My Favorites] group can be

edited. In [Artist] group, only the pronunciation

of the artist playlist can be edited.

Switching to the edit mode

1Touch the playlist in the [Albums], [My

Favorites], or [Artists].

2Touch the track you want to edit.

The item displayed in blue is the track cur-

rently playing.

3Touch .

The system enters the track edit mode.

➲“Operating the track edit mode” ➞

Page 113

4Touch [Back] to return the previous

screen.

5Touch to return to the previous

level.

The item displayed in blue is the selected play-

list.

6Touch .

The system enters the playlist edit mode.

❒To return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

Operating the playlist edit mode

“Album” playlist:

All editing operations are possible. The edited

contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard

disk drive.

“My Mix” playlist, “My Favorite” playlist:

Only (4), (6), and (8) can be performed.

(1) Entering a desired playlist title

➲“Changing the title of the playlist or track” ➞

Page 113

(2) Editing the pronunciation that is used as

a voice command for voice recognition

➲“Changing the pronunciation of a playlist

name or track name” ➞ Page 114

(3) Entering a desired artist name

➲“Renaming an artist name in the playlist or

track” ➞ Page 114

(4) Sorting playback order of the playlists

➲“Sorting the playlists” ➞ Page 115

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(4) (6) (8)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 112 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

113

AV Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Music Library)

(5) Deleting the playlist

➲“Deleting a playlist” ➞ Page 115

(6) Deleting the selected tracks from that

playlist

➲“Deleting a track from the playlist” ➞

Page 116

(7) Updating title information

➲“Assigning another candidate for title infor-

mation” ➞ Page 116

(8) Adding the selected tracks to “My Favor-

ite”

➲“Registering multiple tracks at a time” ➞

Page 111

Operating the track edit mode

“Album” playlist:

All items can be edited except for (5). The edited

contents will be reflected to all groups in the hard

disk drive.

“My Mix” playlist, “My Favorite” playlist:

Only (5), (6), (8) can be performed.

(1) Entering a desired track title

➲“Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 112

(2) Editing the pronunciation that is used as

a voice command for voice recognition

➲“Changing the pronunciation of a playlist

name or track name” ➞ Page 114

(3) Entering a desired artist name

➲“Renaming an artist name in the playlist or

track” ➞ Page 114

(4) Changing genre

➲“Changing the genre of a track” ➞ Page 116

(5) Changing the order to play back tracks

➲“Sorting the tracks in “My Mix” (“My Favorite”)

playlist” ➞ Page 115

(6) Deleting the current track

➲“Deleting the current track” ➞ Page 116

(7) Updating track title information

➲“Assigning another candidate for title infor-

mation” ➞ Page 116

(8) Adding the track to “My Favorite”

➲“Register tracks one by one” ➞ Page 111

Changing the title of the playlist or

track

You can change titles of playlists or tracks. The

titles changed here are displayed on the screen.

1Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit

mode.

➲“Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 112

2Touch [Title].

3Touch [Yes].

The content to be changed in Step 4 can be

reflected to the voice command.

No:

Proceeds to the next step without registering

it as a voice command.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(6) (7)

(4)

(8)

(6)(5) (8)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 113 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

114

Chapter 11Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

4Enter a new character string, and then

touch [OK].

The system pronounces the character string

once, and the pronunciation confirmation

message appears. Touch [Yes] to fix the

change.

No:

Returns to the detailed information screen.

Repeat:

You can listen to the pronunciation again.

❒If the pronunciation is not desired one, edit

the character so that the pronunciation

can be match with your intention.

5Touch [Yes].

The changed character string is fixed and the

system returns to the previous screen.

Changing the pronunciation of a playl-

ist name or track name

You can change the pronunciation of playlist or

track name. The pronunciation is used as a com-

mand for voice recognition.

❒Only pronunciation can be edited for “Artist”

playlist.

❒The navigation system recognises only the

voice recognition character registered in the

current language. If you change the interface

language, the voice recognition character reg-

istered before you change the language will

not be recognised.

1Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit

mode.

➲“Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 112

2Touch .

3Enter a new character string, and then

touch [OK].

The system pronounces the character once,

and the pronunciation confirmation message

appears. Touch [Yes] to fix the change.

No:

Returns to the detailed information screen.

Repeat:

You can listen to the pronunciation again.

❒If the pronunciation is not desired one, edit

the character so that the pronunciation

can be match with your intention.

4Touch [Yes].

The changed character is fixed and the sys-

tem returns to the previous screen.

Renaming an artist name in the playlist

or track

You can rename the artist name in the playlist or

track.

1Enter the playlist edit mode or track edit

mode.

➲Displaying detailed information screen ➞

Page 109

2Touch [Artist].

3Touch [Select from history List].

[Keyboard Input]:

The character input screen appears, and you

can change the artist name with the keyboard.

4Select an artist name from the list.

The artist name is changed to the one you

selected. In the playlist edit mode, touching

[Yes] changes the artist name to the one you

selected.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 114 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

115

AV Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Sorting the playlists

The playback order of playlists in the group can

be changed.

❒If there is only one playlist, the playback order

cannot be changed.

1Enter the playlist edit mode.

➲“Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 112

2Touch [Sort Playlists].

3Touch the playlist that you want to

change the order for.

4Touch , , , or to determine the

position you want to put.

Moves playlists by page.

Moves playlists one by one.

5Touch the selected playlist again.

The position of that playlist is fixed.

6Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the

playback order of other playlists.

7Touch [ESC].

The new order is fixed, and the system returns

to the normal playback screen.

Sorting the tracks in “My Mix” (“My

Favorite”) playlist

The playback order of tracks in “My Mix” playlist

and “My Favorite” playlist can be changed.

1Enter the track edit mode.

➲“Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 112

2Touch [Sort Tracklists].

3Touch the track that you want to change.

4Touch , , , or to determine the

destination.

5Touch the selected track again.

The destination is fixed.

6Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the

playback order of other tracks.

7Touch [ESC].

The new order is fixed, and the system returns

to the normal playback screen.

Deleting a playlist

You can delete a playlist in [Albums] group. (You

cannot delete playlists in other groups.)

❒If you delete a playlist in [Albums] group, all

tracks in the playlist are deleted from the hard

disk drive. (They are deleted from [My Favor-

ites] group at the same time.)

❒If you delete the playlist, the system does not

delete the edited title information, such as

album title, artist name, or track name.

1Enter the playlist edit mode.

➲“Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 112

2Touch [Delete This Playlists].

3Touch [Yes].

The playlist is deleted.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 115 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

116

Chapter 11Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

Deleting a track from the playlist

You can delete tracks from the playlist.

❒If you delete a track in [Albums] group, the

track is deleted from the hard disk drive. (It is

deleted from [My Favorites] group at the

same time.)

❒If you delete the track, the system does not

delete the edited title information.

❒If you delete the tracks in “My Mix” playlist or

“My Favorite” playlist, they are only deleted

from the playlist, and not from the hard disk

drive.

1Enter the playlist edit mode.

➲“Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 112

2Touch [Delete Tracks].

3Touch the tracks you want to delete.

When you touch a track, a tick mark appears

indicating that it is selected. To deselect it,

touch the track again.

Touch 6 to proceed to the next operation.

Select All:

Selects all tracks in the playlist.

All Off:

Cancels the selection of all tracks in the playl-

ist.

4Touch [Back].

5Touch [Yes].

Deleting the current track

❒If you delete the track, the track is deleted

from the hard disk drive. (It is deleted from

[My Favorites] group at the same time.)

❒If you delete the track, the system does not

delete the edited title information.

❒If you delete the tracks in “My Mix” playlist or

“My Favorite” playlist, they are only deleted

from the playlist, and not from the hard disk

drive.

1Enter the track edit mode.

➲“Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 112

2Touch [Delete This Track].

3Touch [Yes].

Changing the genre of a track

1Enter the track edit mode.

➲“Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 112

2Touch [Genres].

3Select the desired genre from the list.

The genre is changed, and the system returns

to the previous screen.

Assigning another candidate for

title information

If the current title information is not desired title,

you can search for another title information from

Gracenote® Database in the hard disk drive man-

ually and assign another candidate.

If there were multiple options of title information,

you can select one title from them.

❒Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote

is the industry standard in music recognition

technology and related content delivery. For

more information visit www.gracenote.com.

❒Once you update the title information, the

information you edit before will be overwritten

by the title information of the Gracenote®

Database.

1Select the playlist in [Albums] group, and

enter the playlist edit mode or track edit

mode.

➲“Switching to the edit mode” ➞ Page 112

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 116 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

117

AV Chapter 11 Using the AV Source (Music Library)

2Touch [Update Title].

Information search begins. When the title

information is obtained, the candidates

screen appears.

3Select the desired album title from the

list.

The title information is updated to the one you

selected.

The disc updates the Gracenote® Data-

base for the Gracenote Music recognition

service on your navigation system will be

available in the future.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 117 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

118

Chapter 11Using the AV Source (Music Library) AV

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 118 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

119

Chapter 12 Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)AV

Chapter 12

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)

When Pioneer audio equipment is connected to

the navigation system using IP-BUS or AV-BUS,

such equipment can be operated from the navi-

gation system. This chapter describes the opera-

tion of the audio source that can be used when

the Pioneer audio equipment is connected. When

reading this chapter, please also refer to the oper-

ation manual of the AV equipment connected to

the navigation system.

Operating the Multi-CD Player

You can use the navigation system to control a

multi-CD player, which is sold separately.

❒Only those functions described in this manual

are available for multi-CD player. (Depending

on the multi-CD player, the function may be

invalid.)

Selecting [M-CD] as the source

1Touch the source icon and touch [M-CD].

➲For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Disc number indicator

Shows the disc currently playing.

(3) Disc title indicator*

Shows the disc title currently playing.

(4) Repeat range indicator

Shows which repeat range has been selected.

(5) Track number indicator

Shows the track currently playing.

(6) Track title indicator*

Shows the track title currently playing.

(7) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

(8) Disc number display

Shows the disc number in multi-CD player.

❒The titles of the items marked with an asterisk

(*) will be displayed only when the CD TEXT

disc is used. When using a normal music CD,

they are displayed as [–].

Touch key operation

1Touch the source icon and then touch [M-

CD] to select the multi-CD player.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

❒When the multi-CD player has performed the

preparatory operations, Ready is displayed.

❒If the multi-CD player does not operate prop-

erly, an error message such as Error-XX may

be displayed. Refer to the multi-CD player

owner’s manual.

❒If there are no discs in the multi-CD player

magazine, No Disc is displayed.

(1) (4)

(5) (2) (3) (6)

(8)

(7)

(4) (5)

(3)

(8)

(7)(6)(1)

(2)

(3)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 119 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

120

Chapter 12Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV) AV

(1) Changing the disc in the magazine

(2) Playback and Pause

Touching ; switches between "playback" and

"pause".

(3) Touch: Skip the track forward or back-

ward

Touching 9 skips to the start of the next track.

Touching 7 once skips to the start of the cur-

rent track. Touching again will skip to the previ-

ous track.

Touch and hold: fast backward or forward

Keep touching 7 or 9 to perform fast back-

ward or forward.

❒You can also perform these operations by

using the TRK (4/6) button.

(4) Playing back the previous disc

The disc previous to the currently played disc will

be played.

(5) Playing back the next disc

The disc next to the currently played disc will be

played.

(6) Repeating play

Each touch of changes the settings as fol-

lows:

Track Repeat – Repeat just the current track

Disc Repeat – Repeat the current disc

❒If you select other discs during repeat play,

the repeat play range setting will be cancelled.

❒If you perform track search or fast forward/

rewind during Track Repeat, the repeat play

range changes to Disc Repeat.

(7) Playing tracks in random order

Tracks will play in a random order within the pre-

viously selected repeat ranges.

❒If you perform random play during [Track

Repeat], the repeat play range changes to

[Disc Repeat].

(8) Scanning play

The first 10 seconds of each track of the current

disc (or the first track of each disc) is played.

❒When you find the desired track (or disc)

touch to turn scan play off.

❒After track or disc scanning is finished, nor-

mal playback of the tracks will begin again.

Indicator Implication

[Random]

only

Tracks of all disc in the magazine

are played in random order.

[Disc Repeat]

and [Random]

Tracks in the selected disc are

played in random order.

Indicator Implication

[Scan] only The beginning of the first tracks of

each disc is played for about 10

seconds.

[Disc Repeat]

and [Scan]

The beginning of each track in the

selected disc is played for about

10 seconds.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 120 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

121

Chapter 12 Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)AV

Operating the iPod®

You can control an iPod by combining the Pio-

neer iPod adapter (sold separately) to the naviga-

tion system. For details concerning operation,

refer to the owner’s manual of iPod adapter. This

section provides information on iPod operations

with the navigation system that differ from those

described in the owner’s manual of iPod adopted.

❒When you use the iPod (sold separately) with

this Navigation System, Pioneer iPod adapter

is required.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Selecting [iPod] as the source

1Touch the source icon and touch [iPod].

➲For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Song number indicator

Shows the number of song playing in the

selected list.

(3) Repeat play indicator

Shows whether Repeat is selected for the current

song or all song on current list.

(4) Shuffle play indicator

Shows whether Shuffle play is selected for songs

of albums.

(5) Album title indicator

Shows the album title of the song.

(6) Artist name indicator

Shows the artist name of the current song.

(7) Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

song.

(8) Song title indicator

Shows the title of the current song.

(9) Playing Song Information

Shows the information and status of the current

song.

(10) Song title, Artist name, and Album title

indicator

When playing a song, Song title, Artist name, and

Album title are displayed.

Touch key operation

1Touch the source icon and then touch

[iPod] to select the iPod.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

(1) Playback and Pause

Touching ; switches between "playback" and

"pause".

(2) Touch: Skip back or forward to another

song

Touching 9 skips to the start of the next song.

Touching 7 once skips to the start of the cur-

rent song. Touching again will skip to the previ-

ous song.

Touch and hold: fast forward or rewind

❒You can also perform these operation with

pressing the TRK (4/6) button.

(3) Displaying the previous screen

Touch on the refine search or other screen to

return to the previous screen.

(1) (2) (5) (3) (4)

(6)

(7)

(10) (9)

(8)

(2) (4) (3)

(2)

(1)

(6)(5)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 121 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

122

Chapter 12Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV) AV

(4) Narrowing down the tracks to play back

You can narrow down the choices of songs to

play from five categories.

➲“Browsing for a song” ➞ Page 122

(5) Repeating play

Touch repeatedly until the desired repeat

range appears in the display.

•Repeat One – Repeat just the current song

•Repeat All – Repeat all songs in the selected

list

(6) Shuffle play

This function shuffles songs or albums and plays

them in random order.

Each touch of changes the settings as fol-

lows:

•Shuffle Songs – Play back songs in random

order within the selected list

•Shuffle Albums – Selected an album ran-

domly, and then play back all songs in that

album in order

Browsing for a song

The operations for controlling an iPod with this

navigation system are designed to be close to

iPod operation. This allows you to search and

play songs as you would with an iPod.

1Touch [Search].

If you do nothing about 30 seconds after the

Step 1 to the Step 4 is done, actual screen

returns to the previous screen.

2Touch one of the categories in which you

want to search for a song.

•Playlists (playlists)

•Artists (artists)

•Albums (albums)

•Songs (songs)

•Genres (genres)

The search screen is displayed.

The icon on the left indicates that the item

is a “Playlist”, and the icon indicates that

the item is a “Song”.

❒If you select [Songs], proceed to step 4.

❒When you select Artists, Albums or

Genres you can start a playback of all

songs in the selected list. To do this, keep

touching the list title.

3Touch a list title that you want to play.

Repeat this operation until you find the

desired song.

❒To return to the previous screen touch

4From the song list, touch the song you

want to play.

❒To go to the next page of the list, touch .

❒To return to the previous page of the list,

touch .

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 122 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

123

Chapter 12 Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)AV

Operating the TV tuner

• For safety reasons, visual images cannot

be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.

To view visual images, you must stop in a

safe place and put on the handbrake

before setting your route (see page 14

Interlock for details).

You can use the navigation system to control a TV

tuner (e.g. GEX-P6400TVP, GEX-P5700TVP), which

is sold separately. For details concerning opera-

tion, refer to the TV tuner’s operation manual.

This section provides information on TV opera-

tions with the navigation system that differ from

those described in the TV tuner’s operation man-

ual. When you attempt to watch visual images

while driving, the warning Viewing of front seat

video source while driving is strictly prohib-

ited. will appear on the screen.

Selecting [TV] as the source

1Touch the source icon and touch [TV].

➲For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) Band indicator

Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to.

(3) Preset number indicator

Shows which preset has been selected.

(4) Channel indicator

Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned.

(5) Preset list display

Shows the preset list.

Touch key operation

1Touch the source icon and then touch

[TV] to select the TV tuner.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

(1) Selecting channels from the list

The list lets you see the list of channels and

select one of them to view.

❒Touching or switches to the next or previ-

ous page in the list.

❒You can register your favourite channels in the

list.

➲“Storing and recalling broadcast stations” ➞

Page 124

(2) Touch: Perform manual tuning

The channels move up or down step by step.

Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning

The tuner will scan the channels until a broad-

cast strong enough for good reception is found.

❒If you keep touching or you

can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning

starts as soon as you release the keys.

❒You can also perform these operation by using

the TRK (4/6) button.

(3) Storing the strongest broadcast stations

sequentially

Twelve channels with strong reception sensitivity

can be registered automatically in the preset list.

➲“Storing the strongest broadcast stations

sequentially” ➞ Page 124

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(3)

(5)

(2)

(4)

(1)

(3)

(5)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 123 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

124

Chapter 12Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV) AV

(4) Change band

Touching [Band] switches between “TV 1” and

“TV 2”.

(5) Selecting the country group

➲“Selecting the country group” ➞ Page 124

Storing and recalling broadcast

stations

If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1 –

P12, you can easily store up to 12 broadcast sta-

tions for later recall with a touch of the key.

1When you find a station that you want to

store in memory keep touching a preset

tuning key P1 – P12.

The selected station has been stored in mem-

ory. The next time you touch the same preset

tuning key P1 – P12 the station is recalled

from memory. To switch between P1 – P6 and

P7 – P12, touch or . When the touch

panel keys are not displayed, you can display

them by touching the screen.

❒Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV

bands can be stored in memory.

❒You can also press the P.LIST (8/2) but-

ton to recall stations assigned to preset

tuning keys P1 – P12.

Storing the strongest broadcast

stations sequentially

1Touch and hold [BSSM].

BSSM starts. The 12 strongest broadcast sta-

tions will be stored under preset tuning keys

P1 – P12 in order from the lowest channel up.

❒To cancel the storage process, touch

[Cancel].

❒Storing broadcast stations with [BSSM]

may replace current broadcast stations

stored in preset memory.

Selecting the country group

1Touch [Area].

2Touch [Up] or [Down] to select the appro-

priate country group.

❒For the details of country code, refer to the

“Owner’s Manual” of the TV tuner.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 124 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

125

Chapter 13 Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)AV

Chapter 13

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

Operating the AV Input source

(AV)

• For safety reasons, visual images cannot

be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.

To view visual images, you must stop in a

safe place and put on the handbrake

before setting your route (see page 14

Interlock for details).

Selecting [AV INPUT] as the

source

1[AV Input] is set to [Video].

➲Selecting the video input ➞ Page 136

2Touch the source icon and touch [AV

INPUT].

➲For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

Operating the External Unit

(EXT)

The term [external unit] refers to future Pioneer

devices that are not currently planned for, or

although devices are not fully controlled by this

navigation system, devices enable control of

basic functions. Two external units can be con-

trolled by this navigation system. When two exter-

nal units are connected, the navigation system

allocates them to external unit 1 or external unit

2. For details concerning operation, refer to the

external unit’s operation manual. This section

provides information on external unit operations

with navigation system that differ from those

described in the external unit’s operation man-

ual.

❒Operation varies depending on the external

unit connected. (In some cases, the external

unit may not respond.)

Selecting [EXT 1] or [EXT 2] as

the source

1Touch the source icon and touch [EXT 1]

or [EXT 2].

➲For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

Screen configuration

(1) Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

(2) External unit indicator

Displays any connected external units.

Touch key operation

1Touch the source icon and then touch

[EXT 1] or [EXT 2] to select the external

unit.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch keys

(

) (

)

(2)

(1)

(4)

(3)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 125 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

126

Chapter 13Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX) AV

(1) Sending an 8, 2, 4, or 6 command

Touch to operate the external unit.

❒Operation varies depending on the external

unit connected. (In some cases, some func-

tions may not be used until you touch and

hold the key.)

(2) Sending a band command

Touch to send a band command to the external

unit.

❒Operation varies depending on the external

unit connected. (In some cases, the external

unit may not respond.)

(3) Sending a 1 key to 6 key command

➲“Operate the external unit by using 1 key – 6

key” ➞ Page 126

(4) Operate the external unit by using

Function 1 to Function 4 key and Auto/Man-

ual key

➲“Operate the external unit by using Function 1

– Function 4” ➞ Page 126

➲“Switching the automatic and manual func-

tion” ➞ Page 126

Operate the external unit by

using 1 key – 6 key

The external unit can be operated by transmitting

the operating commands set to 1 key – 6 key.

1Touch [1 – 6 ].

2Touch desired key ([1 – 6 ]) to operate the

external unit.

❒To return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

❒Operation varies depending on the exter-

nal unit connected. (In some cases, some

functions may not be used until you touch

and hold the key.)

Operate the external unit by

using Function 1 – Function 4

The external unit can be operated by transmitting

the operating commands set to Function 1 –

Function 4.

❒The operating commands set to Function 1 –

Function 4 vary depending on the external

unit.

1Touch [Function].

2Touch [Function 1, 2, 3 or 4].

The operation command is transmitted to the

external unit.

❒Some functions may not be used until you

touch and hold the key.

❒To return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

Switching the automatic and

manual function

You can turn automatic and manual function on

or off. You can switch between Auto and Manual

functions of the external unit connected. Initially,

this function is set to Auto.

❒Operating commands set for Auto and

Manual operations vary depending on the

external unit connected.

1Touch [Function].

2Touch [Auto/Manual].

Touching [Auto/Manual] switches between

[Auto] and [Manual].

❒Operation varies depending on the exter-

nal unit connected. (In some cases, the

external unit may not respond.)

❒To return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 126 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

127

AV Chapter 13 Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

Operating the AUX input source

(AUX)

An IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-

RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect

your navigation system to auxiliary equipment

featuring RCA output. For more details, refer to

the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector owner’s manual.

Selecting [AUX] as the source

1[AUX Input] is set to [On].

➲“Switching the auxiliary setting” ➞

Page 137

2Touch the source icon and touch [AUX].

➲For details, refer to “Selecting a source” ➞

Page 85

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 127 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

128

Chapter 13Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX) AV

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 128 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

129

Chapter 14 Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

Chapter 14

Customising the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

Various settings are available with the audio

source according to your audiovisual requests.

This chapter describes the methods of changing

the various settings and how to set of the LCD

panel.

AV Setting Overview

The audio visual setting is divided into [Audio

Settings] and [System Settings].

Audio Settings screen

System Settings screen

➲Operation for [Audio Settings] ➞ Page 129

to 133

➲Operation for [System Settings] ➞ Page 133

to 139

❒When Pre Out (the subwoofer controller set-

ting in System Settings menu) is Full, the

Non Fading will be displayed instead of Sub

Woofer.

➲“Setting the rear output and subwoofer con-

troller” ➞ Page 138

When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you

cannot select [Source Level].

How to operate the Audio Set-

tings screen

1Press the AV button.

The Navigation screen changes to the Audio

source screen (of any source).

2Touch [AV Settings].

The AV Settings screen appears.

3Touch the item you want to change.

4Change Setting.

(E.g. Equaliser screen)

❒Touch [ESC] to return to the selected

source screen currently.

❒Touch [Back] to return to the AV Settings

screen.

Customising the Audio Settings

Items

Using the equaliser

The equaliser lets you adjust the equalisation to

match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics as

desired.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 129 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

130

Chapter 14

Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual AV

Recalling equaliser curves

There are six stored equaliser curves which you

can easily recall. Here is a list of the equaliser

curves:

1Touch [Equalizer] in the Audio Settings

menu.

2Touch desired equaliser.

❒When Flat is selected, no supplement or

correction is made to the sound. This is

useful to check the effect of the equaliser

curves by switching alternatively between

Flat and a set equaliser curve.

Adjusting equaliser curves

You can adjust the currently selected equaliser

curve setting as desired.

•A separate Custom1 curve can be created for

each source. If you make adjustments when a

curve Super Bass, Powerful, Natural,

Vocal, Flat, or Custom1 is selected, the

equaliser curve settings will be memorised in

Custom1.

•A Custom2 curve can be created common to

all sources. If you make adjustments when the

Custom2 curve is selected, the Custom2

curve will be updated.

❒The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorised for

each of the source selected, but one curve is

shared for the following sources.

In the built-in DVD drive, different curves can

be memorised for a DVD-Video and a CD (CD-

DA or MP3).

•AM and FM

•EXT 1 and EXT 2

•AUX and AV INPUT

You can adjust the centre frequency, level and

the Q (curve characteristics) of each band

(Low/Mid/High).

•Band:

You can select the band you want to adjust.

•Frequency:

You can select which frequency to be set as

the centre frequency.

•Level:

You can adjust the decibel (dB) level of the

selected band.

•Q:

You can select the details of the curve char-

acteristics. (The following figure shows the

characteristic image.)

1Touch [Equalizer] in the Audio Settings

menu.

2Touch [Customize].

The details setting screen appears.

Equaliser curve

Super Bass

Super Bass is a curve in which only lowrange is

boosted.

Powerful (Default)

Powerful is a curve in which lowrange and highrange

sounds are boosted.

Natural

Natural is a curve in which lowrange and highrange

sounds are slightly boosted.

Vocal

Vocal is a curve in which the midrange sounds, such

as the human vocal range, is boosted.

Flat

Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.

Custom1

Custom1 is an adjusted equaliser curve that you cre-

ate. A separate custom curve can be created.

Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equaliser curves

that you create. Adjustments can be made with a 3-

band parametric equaliser.

Custom2

Custom2 is an adjusted equaliser curve that you cre-

ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all

audio source.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 130 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

131

AV Chapter 14 Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

3Touch 4 or 6 to select the equaliser band

to adjust.

Each time you touch 4 or 6 selects equaliser

bands in the following order:

Low – Mid – High

4Touch 4 or 6 to select the desired centre

frequency.

Low: 40 – 80 – 100 – 160 (Hz)

Mid: 200 – 500 – 1K – 2K (Hz)

High: 3.15K – 8K – 10K – 12.5K (Hz)

5Touch 4 or 6 to adjust the level of the

equaliser band.

Each time you touch 4 or 6 increases or

decreases the level of the equalisation band.

+12dB to –12dB is displayed as the level is

increased or decreased.

6Touch 4 or 6 to select the desired [Q].

Touch 4 or 6 until the desired the curve char-

acteristics appears in the display.

Wide2 – Wide1 – Narrow1 – Narrow2

❒To adjust other bands, repeat step 3 to step

Setting the simulated sound

stage

You can select the desired effect from various

simulated sound stage, such as Music Studio or

Dynamic Theatre. You can also adjust a listener

positioning effect.

Setting a stage that fits your image

1Touch [Staging] in the Audio Settings

menu.

2Touch desired stage setting.

❒The [Living Room] setting that empha-

sizes midrange sound hardly has any

effect near the maximum volume level.

❒When you set staging other than [Off], the

high pass filter (HPF) setting turns [Off].

➲“Using the high pass filter” ➞ Page 132

Adjusting a position effect

You can select a listener position that you want to

make as the centre of sound effects.

1Touch [Staging] in the Audio Settings

menu.

2Touch [Position].

3Touch desired position.

Using balance adjustment

You can select a fader/balance setting that pro-

vides an ideal listening environment in all occu-

pied seats.

1Touch [FAD/BAL] in the Audio Settings

menu.

The FAD/BAL screen appears. When Rear SP

(the subwoofer controller setting in System

Settings menu) is Sub.W, the Balance will

be displayed instead of FAD/BAL.

➲“Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller” ➞ Page 138

2Touch 8 or 2 to adjust front/rear speaker

balance.

Each time you touch 8 or 2 moves the front/

rear speaker balance towards the front or the

rear.

Front: 15 to Rear: 15 is displayed as the

front/rear speaker balance moves from front

to rear.

When the rear output setting is Rear SP

Sub.W, you cannot adjust front/rear speaker

balance.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 131 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

132

Chapter 14

Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual AV

➲“Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller” ➞ Page 138

3Touch 4 or 6 to adjust left/right speaker

balance.

Each time you touch 4 or 6 moves the left/

right speaker balance towards the left or the

right.

Left: 9 to Right: 9 is displayed as the left/

right speaker balance moves from left to right.

Using subwoofer output

The navigation system is equipped with a sub-

woofer output which can be turned on or off.

❒When the subwoofer output is on, you can

adjust the cut-off frequency, the output level,

and the phase of the subwoofer.

1Touch [Sub Woofer] in the Audio Settings

menu.

When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-

ting in System Settings menu) is Full, you

cannot select [Sub Woofer].

➲“Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller” ➞ Page 138

2Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output on.

To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].

3Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select the

phase of subwoofer output.

❒If subwoofer output sound is not clear with

[Normal], change it to [Reverse].

4Touch 4 or 6 to select cut-off frequency.

Each time you touch 4 or 6 selects cut-off

frequencies in the following order:

50 – 80 – 125 (Hz)

Only frequencies lower than those in the

selected range are output from the subwoofer.

5Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the output level

of the subwoofer.

+6 to –6 is displayed as the level is increased

or decreased.

Using non fading output

When the non fading output setting is on, the

audio signal does not pass through navigation

system’s low pass filter (for the subwoofer), but is

output through the RCA output.

1Touch [Non Fading] in the Audio Settings

menu.

Only when Preout (the subwoofer controller

setting in System Settings menu) is Full,

you can select [Non Fading].

➲“Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller” ➞ Page 138

2Touch [On] to turn non fading output on.

To turn non fading output off, touch [Off].

3Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the output level

of the non fading.

+6 to –6 is displayed as the level is increased

or decreased.

Adjusting loudness

Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the

low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.

1Touch [Loudness] in the Audio Settings

menu.

2Touch [On] to turn loudness on.

To turn loudness off, touch [Off].

3Touch 4 or 6 to select a desired level.

Each time you touch 4 or 6 selects level in

the following order:

Low – Mid – High

Using the high pass filter

When you do not want low sounds from the sub-

woofer output frequency range to play from the

front or rear speakers, turn the HPF (high pass fil-

ter) on. Only frequencies higher than those in the

selected range are output from the front or rear

speakers.

1Touch [HPF] in the Audio Settings menu.

2Touch [On] to turn high pass filter on.

To turn high pass filter off, touch [Off].

3Touch 4 or 6 to select cut-off frequency.

Each time you touch 4 or 6 selects cut-off

frequencies in the following order:

50 – 80 – 125 (Hz)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 132 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

133

AV Chapter 14 Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-

ting in System Settings menu) is Sub.W,

the HPF function is effective for front speak-

ers only.

If you change the acoustic field after you set it

once, the high pass filter (HPF) setting turns Off.

Adjusting source levels

Source Level (source level adjustment) lets you

adjust the volume level of each source to prevent

radical changes in volume when switching

between sources.

❒Settings are based on the FM tuner volume

level, which remains unchanged.

1Compare the FM tuner volume level with

the level of the source you wish to adjust.

2Touch [Source Level] in the Audio Set-

tings menu.

3Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the source vol-

ume.

+8 to –8 is displayed as the source volume is

increased or decreased.

Sources are set to same source level adjust-

ment volume automatically.

•CD and ROM (MP3)

•EXT 1 and EXT 2

•AUX and AV INPUT

Customising the System Set-

tings Items

System Settings lets you perform system set up

of different settings for navigation system.

How to view and operate the

System Settings

1Press the AV button.

The Navigation screen changes to the Audio

source screen (of any source).

2Touch [AV Settings].

The AV Settings screen appears.

3Touch [System Settings].

4Touch the item you want to change.

The setting change screen appears, or the set-

ting changes by toggling it.

❒Touch or to move to the

next or previous page.

5Change Setting.

❒Touch [ESC] to return to the selected

source screen.

❒To return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 133 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

134

Chapter 14

Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual AV

Setting up the built-in DVD

drive

You can change the preference for playing a DVD

on the built-in DVD drive.

You can use this menu to change audio, subtitle,

parental lock, and other DVD settings.

Some changings or settings which you have set

here, may be invalid depending on the features of

the DVD disc. For details, see the disc’s instruc-

tions.

❒You can enter this menu while [DVD] is

selected as audio source.

❒If you can enter this menu during DVD play-

back, playback will be stopped and return to

the first chapter.

Setting the language

You can set each desired language for subtitle,

audio, and menu. If the selected language is

recorded on the DVD, subtitles, audio, menu are

displayed in that language.

1Switch the audio source to [DVD].

2Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

3Touch [Subtitle Language], [Audio Lan-

guage] or [Menu Language].

Each language menu is displayed and the cur-

rently set language is selected.

4Touch the desired language.

When you select [Others], a language code

input display is shown. Input the four digit

code of the desired language then touch

[Enter].

➲“Language Code Chart for DVD” ➞

Page 142

❒If the selected language is not recorded on

the disc, the default language specified on

the disc is output and displayed.

❒You can also switch the subtitle and audio

language by touching [Subtitle] or

[Audio] during playback.

➲Changing the subtitle language during

playback (Multi-subtitle) ➞ Page 94

➲Changing audio language during play-

back (Multi-audio) ➞ Page 94

Setting assist subtitles on or off

Assist subtitles offer explanations for the aurally

impaired. However, they are only displayed if they

are recorded on the DVD.

You can turn assist subtitles on or off as desired.

1Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

2Touch [Assist Subtitle].

Touching [Assist Subtitle] switches between

[On] and [Off].

Setting angle icon display

You can set to display the angle icon on

scenes where the angle can be switched.

1Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

2Touch [Multi Angle].

Touching [Multi Angle] switches between

[On] and [Off].

Setting the aspect ratio

There are two kinds of display. A wide screen dis-

play has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of

16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of

4:3. If you use regular rear display has a TV aspect

of 4:3, you can set the aspect radio suitable for

your rear display. (We recommend use this func-

tion only when you want to fit it to rear display.)

❒When using a regular display, select either

Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting 16:9 may

result in an unnatural picture.

1Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

2Touch [TV Aspect].

Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the set-

tings as follows:

•16:9 – Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-

played as it is (initial setting)

•Letter Box – The picture is in the shape of

a letter box with black bands at the top and

bottom of the screen

•Panscan – The picture is cut short at the

right and left of the screen

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 134 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

135

AV Chapter 14 Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

❒When playing discs don’t have panscan

system, playback is with [Letter Box] even

if you select the [Panscan] setting. Con-

firm whether the disc package bears like

the mark.

Setting the parental lock

Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental lock

to give an restriction so that children can not

watch a violent and adult oriented scenes. You

can set the parental lock level in steps as desired.

❒When you set a parental lock level and then

play a disc featuring parental lock, code

number input indications may be displayed. In

this case, playback will begin when the cor-

rect code number is input.

Setting the code number and level

When you first use this function, register your

code number. If you do not register a code

number, parental lock will not operate.

1Touch [DVD-V Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

2Touch [Parental Level].

3Touch 0 – 9 to input a four digit code

number.

4While the input number is displayed,

touch [Enter].

The code number is registered, and you can

now set the level.

5Touch any of 1 – 8 to select the desired

level.

The parental lock level is set.

•Level 8 – Playback of the entire disc is pos-

sible (initial setting)

•Level 7 – Level 2 – Playback of discs for

children and non-adult oriented discs is

possible

•Level 1 – Playback of discs for children

only is possible

❒If you want to change the parental level,

enter the registered code number in the

Step 3.

❒We recommend to keep a record of your

code number in case you forget it.

❒The parental lock level is recorded on the

disc. You can confirm it by looking at the

disc package, included literature or on the

disc itself. With discs that do not feature a

recorded parental lock level, you cannot

use parental lock.

❒With some discs, parental lock operates to

skip certain scenes only, after which nor-

mal playback resumes. For details, refer to

the disc’s instructions.

❒If you forget the registered code number,

touch [Clear] 10 times on the screen in the

Step 3. The registered code number is can-

celled, letting you register a new one.

Changing the wide screen mode

• For safety reasons, these functions are not

available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop

in a safe place and put on the handbrake

before setting your route (see page 14

Interlock for details).

1Touch [Wide Mode] in the System Set-

tings menu.

The Wide Mode screen appears.

On the Wide Mode screen, you can select the

following items:

Full, Just, Cinema, Zoom or Normal

Normal (normal):

A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no

sense of disparity since its proportions are the

same as that of the normal picture.

Full (full):

A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal

direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV

picture (normal picture) without any omis-

sions.

Just (just):

The picture is enlarged slightly at the centre

and the amount of enlargement increases

horizontally toward the ends of the picture,

enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without

sensing any disparity even on a wide screen.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 135 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

136

Chapter 14

Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual AV

Cinema (cinema):

A picture is enlarged by the same proportion

as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction

and by an intermediate proportion between

Full and Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal

for a cinema-sized picture (wide screen pic-

ture) where captions lie outside the frame.

Zoom (zoom):

A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same propor-

tion both vertically and horizontally; ideal for a

cinema-sized picture (wide screen picture).

❒Different settings can be memorised for

each video source.

❒When video is viewed in a wide screen

mode that does not match its original

aspect ratio, it may appear differently.

❒Remember that use of this system for com-

mercial or public viewing purposes may

constitute an infringement on the author’s

rights protected by the Copyright Law.

❒Video will appear grainy when viewed in

Cinema or Zoom mode.

❒The navigation map and the rear view cam-

era picture is always Full.

Setting for rear view camera

The following two functions are available. The

rear view camera feature requires a separately

sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC1). (For details,

consult your dealer.)

Camera for backing up

The navigation system features a function that

automatically switches to the full-screen rear

camera image installed on your vehicle. When

the gearstick is in REVERSE (R) position, the

screen automatically switches to full-screen rear

view camera.

Camera for Rear view mode

[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g.

when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a

split screen where map information is partially

displayed. Please be aware that in this setting,

camera image is not resized to fit, but that a por-

tion of what is seen by the camera is not viewa-

ble.

• Pioneer recommends the use of a camera

which outputs mirror reversed images,

otherwise screen image may appear

reversed.

❒Immediately confirm whether the display

changes to a rear view camera image when

the gearstick is moved to REVERSE (R) from

another position.

❒When the screen changes to full-screen rear

view camera image during normal driving,

switch to the opposite setting.

❒Initially, this function is set to Off.

1Touch [Camera Input] in the System Set-

tings menu.

2Touch [On] to turn rear view camera set-

ting on.

❒Unless this setting is [On], you cannot

switch to Rear View mode.

3Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriate

setting for polarity.

Each time you touch [Polarity] switches

between the following polarity:

•Battery – When the polarity of the con-

nected lead is positive while the gearstick is

in the REVERSE (R) position

•GND – When the polarity of the connected

lead is negative while the gearstick is in the

REVERSE (R) position

Setting the video input

You can switch the setting according to the con-

nected component.

❒Select [Video] to watch video of a connected

component as AV source.

1Touch [AV Input] in the System Settings

menu.

Each touch of [AV Input] changes the set-

tings as follows:

•Off – No video component is connected

•Video – External video component

•EXT – Pioneer external unit connected with

RCA video cable

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 136 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

137

AV Chapter 14 Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

❒When a Pioneer external unit is connected

with an IP-BUS cable, select [EXT]. When

the audio source is [EXT], the “Video

image” of the Pioneer external unit can be

displayed.

Switching the auxiliary setting

It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with navi-

gation system as the one of source. Activate the

auxiliary setting when using auxiliary equipment

connected to the navigation system.

1Touch [AUX Input] in the System Set-

tings menu.

Touching [AUX Input] switches between

[On] and [Off].

➲“Selecting [AUX] as the source” ➞

Page 127

Switching the muting/attenua-

tion timing

You can select the audio source volume is muted

or attenuated what signal is output. This setting

is invalid for the mute signal has been received

from the CELLULAR MUTE lead connected to the

navigation unit. (Even if this setting is [Off], the

navigation system will mute or attenuate the

audio source volume, when the signal via CELLU-

LAR MUTE lead is output.)

1Touch [Mute Set] in the System Settings

menu.

Each touch of [Mute Set] changes the set-

tings as follows:

•Guide/Tel/VR – The volume is muted or

attenuated by the following condition

– When the navigation outputs the guidance

voice.

– When you use a mobile phone via Bluetooth

technology (dialling, talking, incoming call).

– When the voice recognition mode is acti-

vated.

•Tel/VR – The volume is muted or attenu-

ated by the following condition

– When you use a mobile phone via Bluetooth

technology (dialling, talking, incoming call).

– When the voice recognition mode is acti-

vated.

•Off – The Volume does not change

❒Operation returns to normal when the cor-

respond action is ended.

❒Even when navigation voice guidance itself

cannot be attenuated or muted. If you want

to mute the navigation guidance voice

temporarily, use on the navigation map

screen.

Switching the muting/attenua-

tion level

You can select the muting/attenuation level of

[Mute Set]. This setting is also effected for the

mute signal has been received from the CELLU-

LAR MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.

❒This menu is not available in the following

cases:

– Audio source is [OFF]

– During muting/attenuation

1Touch [Mute Level] in the System Set-

tings menu.

Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-

tings as follows:

•All – The volume becomes 0

•–20dB – The volume becomes 1/10

•–10dB – The volume becomes 1/3

❒When you select [All], [Mute] is displayed

and no audio adjustments are possible

during the sound is turned off.

❒When you select [–20dB] or [–10dB], no

audio adjustments, except volume control,

are possible during the sound is attenu-

ated.

❒Operation returns to normal when the cor-

respond action is ended.

❒Even when a mute signal has been

received from the CELLULAR MUTE lead

connected to the navigation unit, naviga-

tion voice guidance cannot be attenuated

or muted. If you want to mute the naviga-

tion guidance voice temporarily, use on

the navigation map screen.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 137 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

138

Chapter 14

Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual AV

Changing the voice output of the

navigation guidance

You can set the speaker to output the navigation

guidance and phone voice, etc.

1Touch [Guide/Tel SP] in the System Set-

tings menu.

Each touch of [Guide/Tel SP] changes the

settings as follows:

•Left SP – Uses only the front left speaker

•Right SP – Uses only the front right

speaker

•L+R SP – Uses both the front right and left

speakers

Switching the auto aerial setting

If the blue lead of the navigation system is con-

nected to the auto aerial of the vehicle, select

either of the following settings.

•Power – Extends the aerial when the ignition

switch is turned on. The aerial is stored when

the ignition switch is turned off.

•Radio – Extends the aerial only for the FM or

AM source. The aerial is stored when the

source is switched to another.

1Touch [Auto ANT] in the System Set-

tings.

Touching [Auto ANT] switches between

[Power] and [Radio].

❒Regardless of whether [Power] or [Radio]

is selected, turning off the ignition switch

will cause the aerial to automatically

retract.

Setting the clock display on the

video image

You can select whether to display the clock on

the video image screen without touch keys, such

as DVD-Video, AV INPUT, or TV tuner.

1Touch [Clock DISP] in the System Set-

tings menu.

Touching [Clock DISP] switches between

[All SCRN] and [Audio SCRN].

•All SCRN – The clock is overlaid on the

“Video image”

•Audio SCRN – The clock is not overlaid on

the “Video image”

Setting the CD recording mode

You can set whether to start recording tracks

automatically when you play a CD, or to manually

trigger recording.

1Touch [REC Mode] in the System Set-

tings menu.

Each touch of [REC Mode] changes the set-

tings as follows:

•Auto – Records the tracks automatically

when a CD is played

•Manual – Lets you select the tracks you

want to record manually, and records them

•Single – Automatically records only the

first track of the CD

Setting the rear output and sub-

woofer controller

The navigation system’s rear output can be used

for full-range speaker or subwoofer connection. If

you switch Rear SP setting to the Sub.W, you

can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a sub-

woofer without using an auxiliary amp.

Initially, navigation system is set for rear fullrange

speaker connection. When rear output is con-

nected to fullrange speakers (when Rear SP set-

ting is Full), you can connect the RCA subwoofer

output (description on the label) to a subwoofer.

In this case, you can select whether to use the

subwoofer controller’s (low pass filter, phase)

built-in amp of the navigation system or the auxil-

iary amp or subwoofer.

❒If you change the subwoofer controller [Rear

SP] or [Preout], [Sub Woofer] or [Non Fad-

ing] in the Audio Settings menu return to

the factory settings.

❒Both rear speaker leads output and RCA rear

output are switched simultaneously in this

setting.

❒Rear SP can be set only when the source is

[OFF].

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 138 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

139

AV Chapter 14 Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

1Touch [Rear SP] in the System Settings

menu.

2Touch [Full] or [Sub.W] to switch the rear

output setting.

❒When no subwoofer is connected to the

rear output, select Full. When a subwoofer

is connected to the rear speaker leads

directly, select Sub.W.

3Touch [Preout] to switch the subwoofer

output or non fading output.

❒When the [Rear SP] setting is Sub.W,

[Preout] is invalid.

❒Even if you change this setting, there is no

output unless you turn [Non Fading] or

[Sub Woofer] in the Audio Settings

menu [On].

➲“Using non fading output” ➞ Page 132

➲“Using subwoofer output” ➞ Page 132

Switching Auto PI seek

The navigation system can automatically search

for a different station with the same program-

ming, even during preset recall.

❒This function is intended for FM as audio

source. There is no effect on RDS-TMC func-

tionality.

❒[Auto PI] can be set only when the source is

[OFF].

1Touch [Auto PI] in the System Settings

menu.

Touching [Auto PI] switches between [On]

and [Off].

Setting the FM tuning step

Normally the FM tuning step employed by seek

tuning is 50 kHz. When AF or TA is on, the tun-

ing step automatically changes to 100 kHz. It may

be preferable to set the tuning step to 50 kHz

when AF is on.

❒[FM Step] can be set only when the source is

[OFF].

1Touch [FM Step] in the System Settings

menu.

Each time you touch [FM Step] will switch

the FM tuning step between 50 kHz and 100

kHz while AF or TA is on.

❒The tuning step remains at 50 kHz during

manual tuning.

Selecting the TV signal

This setting is required when a Pioneer TV tuner

is connected using the AV-BUS. (This setting is

not necessary otherwise.) If the image cannot be

displayed correctly using [Auto], switch the set-

ting to the TV system (Colour system) that your TV

can receive, or to the TV system (Colour system)

currently being received.

❒[TV SIG] can be set only when the source is

[OFF].

1Touch [TV SIG] in the System Settings.

Each touch of [TV SIG] changes the settings

as follows:

•Auto – Select this setting when you watch

the channel both PAL and SECAM system.

•PAL – Select this setting when you watch

the channel in PAL system only.

•SECAM – Select this setting when you

watch the channel in SECAM system only.

❒TV tuner has no compatibility for selected

TV system (Colour system), video image is

not output correctly even though you set

the appropriate setting. For the details of

compatibility for TV system (Colour sys-

tem), refer to the “Owner’s Manual” of the

TV tuner.

Other Functions

Selecting the video for “Rear

display”

You can choose either to show the same image

as the front screen or to show the selected

source on the “Rear display”.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 139 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

140

Chapter 14

Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual AV

❒The navigation system automatically switches

between NTSC colour system and PAL colour

system for each video and outputs the video

on the “Rear Display”. To correctly output

each type of video on the “Rear Display”, we

recommend using a “Rear Display” with a

function to automatically switch between

NTSC and PAL (e.g. AVD-W1100V).

1Touch the source icon and then touch

[REAR SCREEN].

Each touch of [REAR SCREEN] changes the

settings as follows:

•MIRROR – The video on the front screen of

the navigation unit is output to the “Rear

display”

•DVD – The video and sound of the DVDs

are output to the “Rear display”

•AV – The video and sound of the AV

INPUT are output to the “Rear display”

❒When MIRROR is selected, the following

restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.

– The TV tuner connected with AV-BUS, its

“Video image” cannot be output. (Connect

with TV tuner’s rear output to “Rear display”

directly.)

– When selecting Rear View in the map dis-

play, nothing is displayed.

– All sounds cannot be output for “Rear dis-

play”.

– There is no picture on “Rear display” while

[Picture Adjust] for [Back-Camera] is car-

ried out.

– The map screen navigation images output to

the “Rear display” differ from standard NTSC

format images. Therefore, their quality will be

inferior to the images that appear on the front

screen.

❒When DVD is selected, the following

restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.

– When the CD or MP3 disc is set in the built-

in DVD drive, nothing is output.

❒When AV is selected, the following restric-

tions are applied to “Rear display”.

– The “Video image” and sound are output

only when the AV INPUT has them.

– The “Video image” and sound are output

only when the appropriate setting on [AV

Input] is [Video].

Operating the picture adjust-

ment

• For safety reasons, these functions are not

available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop

in a safe place and put on the handbrake

before setting your route (see page 14

Interlock for details).

You can adjust for each source and rear view

camera.

1Press the V button to display Picture

Adjust screen.

•Brightness – Adjusts the black intensity

•Contrast – Adjusts the contrast

•Color – Adjusts the colour saturation

•Hue – Adjusts the tone of colour (red is

emphasized or green is emphasized)

•Dimmer – Adjusts the brightness of display

•Back-Camera – Shows the picture adjust-

ment display for the rear view camera

❒Touching [Source] while adjusting the

rear view camera image returns you to the

previous screen.

❒The adjustments of Brightness, Contrast

and Dimmer are stored separately when

your vehicle is headlight is on (daytime)

and when your vehicle’s headlight is off

(nighttime). These are switched automati-

cally depending on the condition of the

vehicle’s headlight.

❒You cannot adjust Color and Hue for the

source without a video and navigation map

display.

❒The setting contents can be memorised

separately for the following screen and the

“Video image”.

– AM/FM/M-CD/iPod/AUX screen

– LIBRARY (Music Library) screen

– Built-in DVD drive

– TV image

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 140 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

141

AV Chapter 14 Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

– AV INPUT/EXT

– Rear view camera image

– Navigation map and menu screen

❒The picture adjustment may not be able to

be used with some rear view cameras.

❒Because of the LCD screen characteris-

tics, you may not be able to adjust the

screen at low temperatures.

2Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the desired

item.

Each time you touch [+] or [–] increases or

decreases the level of desired item.

3Touch [ESC] to return to the previous

screen.

Switching the Backlight On/Off

By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,

you can turn off the screen display without turn-

ing off the voice guidance.

1Press and hold the V button.

The backlight turns off, and the screen turns

off.

❒Press the V button once again to turn on

the backlight, and the screen is displayed.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 141 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

142

Chapter 14

Customising the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual AV

Language Code Chart for DVD

Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code

Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619

English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721

French (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813

Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814

German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Rumanian (ro), 1815

Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823

Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901

Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904

Portuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sango (sg), 1907

Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908

Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Shinghalese (si), 1909

Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911

Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912

Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913

Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914

Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915

Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917

Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918

Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919

Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920

Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921

Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923

Belorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Tamil (ta), 2001

Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 Telugu (te), 2005

Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 Tajik (tg), 2007

Bislama (bi), 0209 Laotian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008

Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214 Lithusnian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009

Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222 Turkmen (tk), 2011

Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Tagalog (tl), 2012

Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014

Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Tongan (to), 2015

Czach (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Turkish (tr), 2018

Welsh (cy), 0325 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Tsonga (ts), 2019

Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Tatar (tt), 2020

Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 Twi (tw), 2023

Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111

Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118

Basque (eu), 0521 Burmese (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126

Persian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209

Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 Volapu˜k (vo), 2215

Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wolof (wo), 2315

Faroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408

Frisian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Yoruba (yo), 2515

Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621

Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704 Panjabi (pa), 1601

Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 142 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

143

Chapter 15 Operating Your Navigation System with VoiceNAVI/AV

Chapter 15

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

To Ensure Safe Driving

• For safety reasons, Voice Help menu

(Voice Recog.Help) is not available while

your vehicle is in motion. To enable this

function, you must stop in a safe place and

put on the handbrake before setting your

route.

Basics of Voice Operation

Your Pioneer navigation system uses with the lat-

est in voice recognition technology. You can use

voice commands to operate many of its func-

tions. This chapter describes where you can use

voice commands, and also what commands the

system accepts.

Flow of voice operation

You can start voice operation any time even when

the map screen is displayed or audio is operated.

(Some operations are not available.) The basic

steps of voice operation are as follows.

❒The voice operation may not enable for a

minute after the navigation system has booted

up.

❒If you operate using the “CD-SR1” Steering

Remote Control (sold separately), the follow-

ing buttons can be used for operation:

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:

Same function as VOICE icon.

VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:

Return to previous screen.

Depending on the selected languages, the

interface for voice operation is available in

the following condition.

Swedish, Danish, Norwegian:

English interface is available.

Flemish:

Dutch interface is available.

Portuguese:

Spanish interface is available.

Others:

Selected language’s interface is available.

1Touch VOICE icon to activate voice

operation.

2Speak a command into the micro-

phone after the beep.

3When the command is recognised, the

navigation system displays the

response message on the screen, and

pronounces it in some cases.

4As necessary, repeat Steps 3.

5The requested operation will be car-

ried out.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 143 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

144

Chapter 15Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

To start voice operation

1Touch VOICE icon.

Navigation screen

Audio screen

❒Depending on the operating country of the

navigation system, some commands dis-

played in Voice Help may be unavailable.

Available commands are in white and unavail-

able commands are in grey.

When using voice operation for the first

time

Until you are familiar with this system, it is rec-

ommended to stop the vehicle in a safe place and

refer to the commands displayed in the Voice

Help menu (a list of the words you can speak).

When your vehicle is parked with the handbrake

on, see the Voice Help menu and speak voice

command on that menu (except for some case).

When voice command is possible

When voice command is not accepted

❒When you say “Voice Help”, the navigation

system pronounces the displayed words that

can be vocalised.

❒If no voice icon is displayed, check to see

whether the microphone is properly con-

nected and turn the power on again.

❒If there are multiple pages, voice help menu

can be switched by using or on

the screen. You can also switch the page by

saying “Next page” or “Previous page”.

To cancel voice operation

You can cancel voice operation features at any

time by saying “Cancel”. After you cancel voice

operation, the map is displayed.

❒If no command is made in the next 6 seconds

or the recognition fails three times succes-

sively, the voice recognition switches to

standby mode. To reactivate voice operation,

touch VOICE icon.

No sounds can be out put during .

Voice Help menu

VOICE icon

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 144 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

145

NAVI/AV Chapter 15 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Tips for Voice Operation

For your voice commands to be correctly recog-

nised and interpreted, ensure that conditions are

suitable for recognition.

Reduce the volume setting on your

vehicle audio system

➲“Switching the muting/attenuation timing” ➞

Page 137

Close the vehicle windows

Please note that wind through the vehicle win-

dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the

vehicle can interfere with voice operation.

Position the microphone carefully

For optimum pick-up, the microphone should be

fixed at a suitable distance directly in front of the

driver.

Pause before giving a command

Speaking too soon may cause the recognition to

fail.

Pronounce your commands carefully

Speak slowly, deliberately and clearly.

❒If the registered voice command and the

default voice command is the same, the regis-

tered voice command (e.g. the pronunciation

for the entry in “Address Book” and the

playlist in Music library ) will take priority. In

this case, the default voice command will not

function. To use the default voice command,

change or delete the registered voice com-

mand that is identical to the default voice

command.

An Example of Voice Operation

Search for POI in vicinity

In this example, you want to search for the near-

est petrol station and set as your destination.

❒Give the following verbal commands after

switching to the navigation screen.

➲“Voice commands related to navigation” ➞

Page 147

1Press the MAP button to display the navi-

gation map screen.

2Touch VOICE icon.

A list of commands for voice operation

appears. After the message, the beep indi-

cates that the system is ready to accept your

voice command. Say a command after this

beep.

3Say “Destination”.

A message to prompt the next operation is

given.

4Say “Vicinity Search”.

Say correspond commands for the function

you want to operate. Here, the selection

method of your destination is specified. When

you want to search the petrol station nearest

to the current location, say “Vicinity

Search”.

The message “Vicinity search. Please

request POI category.” appears, and the

navigation system pronounces that message.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 145 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

146

Chapter 15Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

5Say “Petrol Station”.

The message “Vicinity search. Petrol Sta-

tion” appears.

The map of the nearest petrol station is

shown.

❒For categories which can be used as the

voice commands, refer to “Category list for

vicinity search”.

➲Refer to “Category list for vicinity search”

➞ Page 155

6Touch VOICE icon.

7Say “Next” or “Previous” to select the

desired facilities.

8After confirming the location, say “Set As

Destination”.

9Touch VOICE icon.

The message “Starting route calculation.”

appears, and the navigation system pro-

nounces that message.

With the location shown on the map set as the

destination (or waypoint), the route calcula-

tion starts.

❒If you say “Back”, return the previous

screen.

Search for the playlist

In this example, you want to search for the playl-

ist and play that.

1Touch VOICE icon when the audio source

is “LIBRARY”.

2Say “Music Search”.

3Say desired group.

❒If desired group is already selected, you

can skip this step.

4Say the playlist name you want to play.

❒If there are multiple pages, voice help

menu can be switched by using or

on the screen. You can also switch

the page by saying “Next page” or “Previ-

ous page”.

❒You can also search the track in the cur-

rent playlist with saying “Track Search”.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 146 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

147

NAVI/AV Chapter 15 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Using Voice Operation

This section describes the flow and available commands of each voice operation.

❒During the voice operation, location screen (A) or (B) may appear. In such a case, go to “Location

Screen (A) and (B)” in the later section, and continue the voice operation.

➲Location Screen (A) and (B) ➞ Page 151

❒For <Registered location’s pronunciation > shown on the following chart, say the registered pro-

nunciation. For example, if the registered pronunciation in address book is “My office” and you want

to operate “Search by entry on the address book”, say “My office”. In addition, this command can be

used only with the selected language when you register. You can hear and edit the pronunciation.

➲“Changing a pronunciation” ➞ Page 57

❒For <Album playlist name>, <Artist playlist name >, <Track name> shown on the following chart,

say their name in the music library (if you edited their pronunciation, say their pronunciation.). In

addition, this command can be used only with the selected language when you register. You can

hear and edit the pronunciation.

➲“Changing the pronunciation of a playlist name or track name” ➞ Page 114

❒For <Category Name>, <Sub Category Name> in “Vicinity Search”, refer to “Category list for vicin-

ity search” and say the desired category in that list.

❒You can skip the commands with the mark (*). For example, in case search by Point of interest, the

system can recognise the command even if you say “Vicinity Search” without saying “Destination”.

❒If some candidates have been found, the candidate list appears. Select the one from the list and pro-

ceed to next step.

❒The voice operation related the telephone is available only when the condition under the hands-free

phoning feature of this system can be operated and unavailable during a call.

➲“Using Hands-free Phoning” ➞ Page 67

Voice commands related to navigation

❒Give the following verbal commands after switching to the navigation screen.

Basic Operation

Back ➞ Return the previous screen.

Cancel ➞ Cancel the voice operation.

Current location ➞ Return the current location map screen.

Voice Help ➞ Pronounces the display words that can be vocalised.

Next page, Previous page ➞ Switch the page of Voice Help Menu.

Search by entry on the address book

Destination* ➞ Address Book* ➞ <Registered location’s pronunciation> ➞ Location Screen (A)

Search the facilities in vicinity

Destination* ➞ Vicinity Search ➞ <Category Name>, <Sub Category Name> ➞ Location Screen (B)

Displaying the destination history

Destination* ➞ Destination History ➞ Display the Destination History screen.

Setting the route to your home

Destination* ➞ Return Home ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (If there is no

route, the system starts the route calculation.)

Making phone call to your home

Destination*

➞

Call Home

➞

Touch

VOICE

icon to call your home (Only when the phone number is registered in your

home.)

Setting your home to waypoint

Destination* ➞ Waypoint Home ➞ Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (This function is only available if

you have set the destination.)

Display the map of surroundings on your home

Destination* ➞ Display Home ➞ Display the map of surroundings on your home.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 147 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

148

Chapter 15Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

Display the map of surroundings on your destination

Destination* ➞ Display Destination ➞ Display the map of surroundings on your destination.

Set the map location as your destination

Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. ➞ Basic Operation* ➞ Set As Desti-

nation ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If there is no route, the system starts

the route calculation.

Set the map location as your waypoint

Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. ➞ Basic Operation* ➞ Set As Way-

point ➞ Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Registering the map location to the address book

Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. ➞ Basic Operation* ➞ Registration

➞ The system register that point and Information edit screen appears.

Operating the navigation map scale

Map Operation* ➞ Change Scale* ➞ XXXX <kilo> meter(s) Scale <25metres, 50metres, 100metres, 200metres,

500metres, 1kilometre, 2kilometres, 5kilometres, 10kilometres, 20kilometres, 50kilometres, 100kilometres,

200kilometres, 500kilometres> ➞ Map screen will be changed to selected scale.

Notes:

• These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [km].

• This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation* ➞ Change Scale* ➞ XXXX mile(s) Scale <0.02miles, 0.05miles, 0.1miles, 0.25miles, 0.5miles,

0.75miles, 1mile, 2.5miles, 5miles, 10miles, 25miles, 50miles, 100miles, 250miles> ➞ Map screen will be changed to

selected scale.

Notes:

• These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [mile].

• This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation* ➞ Change Scale* ➞ XXXX mile/yards Scale <25yards, 50yards, 100yards, 0.25miles, 0.5miles,

0.75miles, 1mile, 2.5miles, 5miles, 10miles, 25miles, 50miles, 100miles, 250miles> ➞ Map screen will be changed to

selected scale.

Notes:

• These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [Mile&Yard].

• This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation* ➞ Change Scale* ➞ Zoom Out, Zoom In ➞ Map screen will zoom out or zoom in.

Operating the view mode

Map Operation* ➞ Change View Mode* ➞ Map Mode, Driver’s View, Twin Map View, Street List Mode, Mixed Mode,

Rear View, Vehicle Dynamics ➞ Map screen will be changed to selected view mode.

Operating the map orientation

Map Operation* ➞ Heading Up, North Up ➞ Map orientation will be changed.

Recalculating the route

Route Options* ➞ Change Route* ➞ Rerouting, Use Main Road, Use Motorway, Avoid Motorway, Use Ferry, Avoid

Ferry, Use Toll Road, Avoid Toll Road ➞ If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to recalculate.

Checking the current route

Route Options* ➞ Route Profile ➞ Displaying the route profile screen.

Route Options* ➞ Next Guidance ➞ You can hear the information of next guidance point.

Cancelling the route

Route Options* ➞ Cancel Route ➞ If the route is already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel the current route.

Route Options* ➞ Cancel Waypoint ➞ If the waypoint is already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel route until next

waypoint.

Checking the traffic list

Traffic Information* ➞ Traffic On Route List ➞ Displaying the traffic event list on your route.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 148 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

149

NAVI/AV Chapter 15 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

(Note 1): International call with using “+” is not available in the voice operation.

Operating the mobile phone featuring Bluetooth technology

Call* ➞ Telephone Book ➞ Displaying the telephone book. (Unavailable while the vehicle is running.)

Call* ➞ Call Registered Point ➞ <Registered location’s pronunciation> ➞ If the registered location has telephone

number data, touch VOICE icon to call the registered location.

Call* ➞ Redial ➞ Touch VOICE icon to redial.

Call* ➞ Call Phone Number ➞ Say the number you want to call. ➞ Touch VOICE icon to dial. (Note 1)

Call* ➞ Received Call ➞ Displaying the received call list.

Call* ➞ Call Favorite 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ➞ Touch VOICE icon to dial.

Erase the tracking

Other Operation* ➞ Erase Tracks ➞ Touch VOICE icon to delete the tracking.

Turning on or off the Overlay POI

Other Operation* ➞ Display Overlay POI ➞ Displaying the selected POI in Overlay POI.

Other Operation* ➞ Hide Overlay POI ➞ Turn off Overlay POI.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 149 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

150

Chapter 15Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

Voice commands related to AV operation

❒Give the following verbal commands after switching the correspond audio source (except for “Com-

mon AV commands”).

(Note 1): This operation is available only when that group is already selected.

(Note 2): This operation is available for the playlist currently playing.

After checking traffic information manually

If the traffic jam is found after checking the traffic information manually, “Do you want to reroute?”

appears on screen. In this time, you can say voice commands to operate.

Do you want to reroute?

Options:

Yes:

The route will be recalculated by touching VOICE icon.

No:

The route will not be recalculated and the map screen of that location appears.

Common AV commands

AV Operation* ➞ Change Display* ➞ Navigation Screen ➞ Switching to the navigation map or menu screen.

AV Operation* ➞ Change Display* ➞ AV screen ➞ Switching to the Audio source screen.

AV Operation* ➞ Source Off ➞ Turning the Audio source off.

AV Operation* ➞ Change Source* ➞ CD, DVD, AM, FM, TV, MCD, AV Input, AUX, iPod, EXTERNAL1, EXTERNAL2,

Music Library ➞ Switching to the desired audio source. (You cannot switch to an unavailable source.)

Operation for Multi-CD

AV Operation* ➞ Disc 1 to 12 ➞ Selecting the disc for playback.

Operation for FM

AV Operation* ➞ Preset 1 to 6 ➞ Switching to that preset station directly.

AV Operation* ➞ Change Band ➞ Switching the band.

Operation for AM

AV Operation* ➞ Preset 1 to 6 ➞ Switching to that preset station directly.

Operation for TV

AV Operation* ➞ Preset 1 to 12 ➞ Switching to that preset station directly.

AV Operation* ➞ Change Band ➞ Switching the band.

Operation for CD

AV Operation* ➞ Change Media ➞ Switching the CD-DA part and CD-ROM (MP3) part.

Operation for Music Library

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ Album ➞ <Album Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected album playlist.

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ <Album Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected album playlist. (Note 1)

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ Artist ➞ <Artist Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected artist playlist.

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ <Artist Playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected artist playlist. (Note 1)

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ Genre ➞ <Genre playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected genre playlist.

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ <Genre playlist name> ➞ Playback the selected genre playlist. (Note 1)

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ My Favourites ➞ My Favourites 1, My Favourites 2, My Favourites 3, My Favour-

ites 4, MyMix ➞ Playback selected playlist.

AV Operation* ➞ Music Search* ➞ My Favourites 1, My Favourites 2, My Favourites 3, My Favourites 4, MyMix ➞

Playback selected playlist. (Note 1)

AV Operation* ➞ Track Search ➞ <Track name> ➞ Playback the selected track. (Note 2)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 150 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

151

NAVI/AV Chapter 15 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Location screen (A) and (B)

Location screen (A)

The following commands can be vocalised:

Set As Destination

If the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If there is no route, the system

starts the route calculation.

Set as Waypoint

Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Display Map

Displaying the map of surroundings on that location.

Location screen (B)

The following commands can be vocalised:

Set As Destination

Same as above.

Set as Waypoint

Same as above.

Display Map

Same as above.

Seeing the next POI.

Seeing the previous POI.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 151 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

152

Chapter 15Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

Other Voice Commands

The navigation system also can recognise the words in the following list.

Other voice commands for navigation operation

Preferential voice command Other voice command

Back Return, Previous

Cancel Escape, Skip

Current Location My Location

Voice Help Recognition Help, Help

Next Page Next, Following

Previous Page Back Page

Basic Operation Basics, Basic

Set As Destination Set, Go

Set As Waypoint Set Waypoint, Waypoint

Registration Register, Store

Destination Go To, Search

Address Book Registered Points, My Addresses

Destination History Search History, Destination List

Vicinity Search Vicinity, Search Around

Return Home Go Home, Drive Home

Waypoint Home Waypoint To Home, Registered Home As Waypoint

Call Home Phone Home, Dial Home

Display Home Show Home

Display Destination Destination Map, Show Destination

Map Operation Map, Map Option

Zoom Out Out, Higher

Zoom In In, Lower

Change Scale Scale, Zoom

25 metres Scale 25metres

50 metres Scale 50metres

100 metres Scale 100metres

200 metres Scale 200metres

500 metres Scale 500metres

1 kilometre Scale 1kilometre

2 kilometres Scale 2kilometres

5 kilometres Scale 5kilometres

10 kilometres Scale 10kilometres

20 kilometres Scale 20kilometres

50 kilometres Scale 50kilometres

100 kilometres Scale 100kilometres

200 kilometres Scale 200kilometres

500 kilometres Scale 500kilometres

0.02 miles Scale 0.02miles

0.05 miles Scale 0.05miles

0.1 miles Scale 0.1miles

0.25 miles Scale 0.25miles

0.5 miles Scale 0.5miles

0.75 miles Scale 0.75miles

1 mile Scale 1mile

2.5 miles Scale 2.5miles

5 miles Scale 5miles

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 152 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

153

NAVI/AV Chapter 15 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

10 miles Scale 10miles

25 miles Scale 25miles

50 miles Scale 50miles

100 miles Scale 100miles

250 miles Scale 250miles

25 yards Scale 25yards

50 yards Scale 50yards

100 yards Scale 100yards

Change View Mode View Mode, Change View

Map Mode Normal Map, Flat Map

Driver’s View Driver, 3D

Twin Map View Twin, Split

Street List Mode Turns, Turn View

Mixed Mode Guide, Arrow

Rear View Rear, Back View

Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics, Meters

North Up North, Compass

Heading Up Head Up, Car Up

Route Options Change Route Options

Change Route Edit Route

Rerouting New Route, Update Route

Use Main Road Main Roads, Take Main Roads

Use Motorway Motorways, Highways

Use Ferry Ferry, Ferries

Use Toll Road Toll Road, Payroad

Avoid Motorway Avoid Highway, Avoid Interstate

Avoid Ferry Avoid Ferries, Skip Ferries

Avoid Toll Road Avoid Tolls, Avoid Pay

Cancel Route Delete Route, Cancel Guidance

Route Profile Profile

Cancel Waypoint Delete Waypoint, Take Away Waypoint

Next Guidance Following Guidance, Guidance After This

Traffic Information Traffic, View Traffic Info

Traffic On Route List On Route List, Route List

Call Dial, Ring

Call Registered Point Call Address Book, Call Registered

Call Phone Number Call By Number, Call Number

Telephone Book Tel Book, Phone Book

Redial Call Again, Phone Again

Call Favorite 1 Call 1, Phone 1

Call Favorite 2 Call 2, Phone 2

Call Favorite 3 Call 3, Phone 3

Call Favorite 4 Call 4, Phone 4

Call Favorite 5 Call 5, Phone 5

Received Call Received, Who Called

Other Operation Other, Others

Erase Tracks Delete Tracks, Remove Tracks

Display Overlay POI Show Overlay POI, Display POIs

Yes Ok, I Agree

No Not Ok, I Disagree

Preferential voice command Other voice command

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 153 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

154

Chapter 15Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

Other voice commands for AV operation

Preferential voice command Other voice command

AV Input Video Input

MCD CD Changer

Rock/Pop Rock, Pop

Hip-Hop/Rap Hip-Hop, Rap

Soul/Urban Soul, Urban

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 154 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

155

NAVI/AV Chapter 15 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Category list for vicinity search

❒If you say the category name (category title), the system search for vicinity POIs in that category

without taking the chain into consideration.

Category name: Restau-

rants

Italian

Chinese

Fast Food

Thai

Greek

French

Japanese

Indian

Sea Food

Grill and Steak House

Spanish

Cafe and Pub

Restaurants, Others

Category name: Petrol

Station

ABC

AGIP

AGROLA

API

ARAL

ASDA

ATAC

AUCHAN

AVANTI

AVIA

BENZINA

BFT

CAMPSA

CARREFOUR

CEPSA

CHAMPION

COOP MINERALOEL

DEA

DIN-X

DK-BENZIN

EKO

ELAN

ELF

ERG

ESSO

EUROOIL

FINA

FREIE TANKSTELLE

GALP

GULF

HEM

HYDRO

HYDRO TEXACO

INTERMARCHE

JET

LECLERC

LOTOS

MAXOL

METANO

MIGROL

MOL

MORRISONS

MORRISONS SAFEWAY

MURCO

NESTE

OCTA+

OKQ8

OMV

ORLEN

PAP OIL

PETRONOR

PNN

PREEM

RAIFFEISEN

Petrol Station

REPSOL

SAINSBURY

SHELL

SLOVNAFT

ST1

STAR

STATOIL

SUPER U

TAMOIL

TEBOIL

TESCO

TEXACO

TOTAL

UNO-X

WESTFALEN

Petrol Station, Others

Category name: Hotel

B&B HOTELS

BALLADINS

BASTION HOTELS

BEST WESTERN

CAMPANILE

CARLTON

CENTER

CLIMAT DE FRANCE

COMFORT

COMFORT INN

CROWNE PLAZA

DANHOSTEL

DANSK KROFERIE

DE VERE

DITT HOTELL

DORINT

ETAP HOTEL

FIRST HOTELS

FORMULE 1

GOLDEN TULIP

HAMPSHIRE

HESPERIA

HILTON

HOLIDAY INN

HOLIDAY INN EXPRESS

HUSA

IBIS

INNKEEPER’S LODGE

INTER-HOTEL

JURYS DOYLE

KYRIAD

LIBERTEL

LINDNER

LOGIS DE FRANCE

MACDONALD HOTELS

MARRIOTT

MELIA

MERCURE

MINOTEL

MOAT HOUSE

NH HOTELES

NM HOTELS

NORLANDIA

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 155 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

156

Chapter 15Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

NOVOTEL

PARADORES

PARK INN

PARKHOTEL

POUSADAS

PREMIER LODGE

PREMIERE CLASSE

PRIDE OF BRITAIN HOTELS

QUALITY

RADISSON

RADISSON SAS

RAMADA

RAMADA JARVIS

RELAIS DU SILENCE-SILENCE-

HOTEL

RICA HOTELS

SCANDIC

SERCOTEL

SHERATON

SOFITEL

SOKOS HOTELS

SOL

THISTLE HOTELS

TRAVEL INN

TRAVELODGE

TRYP

TULIP INN

VAN DER VALK

Hotel, Others

Category name: Parking

Car Park

Open Parking Areas

Rest Area

Park and Ride

Rent a Car Parking

Category name: Food

Shops

Supermarket

Grocer

Green Grocer

Butcher

Fishmonger

Bakery

Wines and Spirits

Food Shops, Others

Category name:

Shopping

Shopping Centre

Newsagents and Tobacconists

Consumer Electronics

Computers and Software

CDs

DVDs and Videos

Cameras and Photography

Book Shops

Do-It-Yourself

Kitchens and Bathrooms

Furniture

Carpets

Textiles and Lighting

Men’s Clothing

Clothing and Accessories

Women’s Clothing

Children’s Wear

Sportswear

Equipment and Jeans

Footwear

Gifts

Novelties and Souvenirs

Jewellery

Clocks and Watches

Opticians

Garden Centres and Stores

Florists

Office Equipment and Statio-

nery

Toys and Games

Shopping, Others

Category name: Cash

Dispenser/Bank

AARGAUISCHE KANTONAL-

BANK

ABN AMRO

BALOISE BANK SOBA

BANQUE CANTONALE DE FRI-

BOURG

BANQUE CANTONALE DE

GENEVE

BANQUE CANTONALE DU

VALAIS

BANQUE CANTONALE NEU-

CHATELOISE

BANQUE CANTONALE VAU-

DOISE

BANQUE POPULAIRE DE

L’OUEST

BARCLAYS

BASELLANDSCH. KANTONAL-

BANK

BASLER KANTONALBANK

BCEE

BERNER KANTONALBANK

BICS - BANQUE POPULAIRE

BNP PARIBAS

BRED BANQUE POPULAIRE

CESKA SPORITELNA

CIN

CLIENTIS

COOP

CREDIT LYONNAIS

CREDIT SUISSE

CSOB

DE POST

DEXIA

EURONET SERVICES

FORTIS

FRIESLAND BANK

GE MONEY BANK

GRAUBUNDNER KANTONAL-

BANK

HSBC

ING

KBC

LA POSTE

LUZERNER KANTONALBANK

LYONNAISE DE BANQUE

MIGROSBANK

MONEYBOX

NEUE AARGAUER BANK

POSTBANK

RABOBANK

RAIFFEISEN

RBA

SANKT GALLISCHE KAN-

TONALBANK

SCALBERT-DUPONT

SCHWYZER KANTONALBANK

SNS BANK

SOCIETE BORDELAISE

SOCIETE GENERALE

SPAREBANK1

SWISS POST

THURGAUER KANTONAL-

BANK

UBS

VALIANT

ZUGER KANTONALBANK

ZURCHER KANTONALBANK

Cash Dispenser/Bank, Others

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 156 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

157

NAVI/AV Chapter 15 Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Category name: Sport

Sports Centre

Fitness Clubs

Golf Course

Tennis Court

Ice Skating Rink

Swimming Pool

Water Sports

Horse-Riding

Billiards

Snooker

Pool

Bowling

Category name: Leisure

Disco

Museum

Cinema

Arcades and Casino

Amusement Park

Camping

Tourist Attraction

Tourist Office

Travel Agencies

Yacht Basin

Beach

Stadium

Concert Hall

Theatre and Opera

Cultural Centre

Winery

Parks and Gardens

Zoo

Category name: Services

Hair dresser

Beauty Salon

Real Estate Agency

Dry Cleaning

Category name: Medical

Hospital

Pharmacy

Dentist

Doctor

Veterinarian

Category name: Public

Service

Exhibition and Conference Cen-

tre

Universities and Schools

Post Office

Library

Church

Police Station

Embassy

Courthouse

Government Office

City Centre

Category name: Trans-

port

Airport

Train Station

Ferry Terminal

Border Crossing

Airport Terminal

Category name: Car

Dealer

ALFA ROMEO

ASTON MARTIN

AUDI

BENTLEY

BMW

BOSCH

CADILLAC

CHEVROLET

CHRYSLER

CITROEN

DAEWOO

DAF

DAIHATSU

EUROMOBIL

FERRARI

FIAT

FORD

HONDA

HYUNDAI

HYUNDAI TRUCKS

IVECO

JAGUAR

JEEP

KIA

LADA

LAMBORGHINI

LANCIA

LAND ROVER

LEXUS

LINCOLN

LOTUS

MACK

MAN

MASERATI

MAYBACH

MAZDA

MEGA

MERCEDES-BENZ

MERCEDES-BENZ TRUCKS

MERCURY

MINI

MITSUBISHI

MITSUBISHI TRUCKS

NISSAN

OPEL

PEUGEOT

PORSCHE

PROTON

RENAULT

RENAULT TRUCKS

ROLLS-ROYCE

ROVER

SAAB

SCANIA

SEAT

SKODA

SMART

SSANGYONG

SUBARU

SUZUKI

TOYOTA

VAUXHALL

VOLKSWAGEN

VOLKSWAGEN TRUCKS

VOLVO

VOLVO TRUCKS

Car Dealer, Others

Category name: Vehicle

Repair Facility

AA, Repair

ADAC, Repair

ALFA ROMEO, Repair

AUDI, Repair

BMW, Repair

BOSCH, Repair

CHRYSLER, Repair

CITROEN, Repair

DAEWOO, Repair

FEU VERT, Repair

FIAT, Repair

FORD, Repair

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 157 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

158

Chapter 15Operating Your Navigation System with Voice NAVI/AV

HONDA, Repair

HYUNDAI, Repair

JEEP, Repair

KIA, Repair

LANCIA, Repair

MAZDA, Repair

MERCEDES-BENZ, Repair

MIDAS, Repair

MITSUBISHI, Repair

NISSAN, Repair

NORAUTO, Repair

OAMTC, Repair

OPEL, Repair

PEUGEOT, Repair

RENAULT, Repair

ROVER, Repair

SAAB, Repair

SEAT, Repair

SKODA, Repair

SPEEDY, Repair

SUZUKI, Repair

TOYOTA, Repair

VOLKSWAGEN, Repair

VOLVO, Repair

VSCI, Repair

Vehicle Repair Facility, Others

Category name: Automo-

tive

Body Shops

Car Glass Replacement

General Car Repair and Servic-

ing

Sales and Installation of Car

Accessories

Tyre Service

Category name: Rental

Car Agency

ADA

ALAMO

AVIS

BUDGET

CAR’GO

EUROMOBIL

Rental

EUROPCAR

HERTZ

HYRBILEN

ITALY BY CAR

KAV AUTOVERHUUR

KENNING

MABI HYRBILAR

MAGGIORE

NATIONAL

NATIONAL CAR RENTAL

NATIONAL CITER

NATIONAL-ATESA

OKQ8

Rental

PREEM

Rental

RENT A CAR

SCANDIA RENT

SHELL

Rental

SIXT

STATOIL

Rental

THRIFTY

TRANSVELL

Rental Car Agency, Others

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 158 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

159

AppendixNAVI/AV

Appendix

Returning the Navigation System to the Default or Factory Settings

You can return settings or recorded contents to the default or factory settings. There are four methods

to clear user data, and the situations and the cleared content are different for each method. For the

content to be cleared in each methods, see the list presented later.

❒The map data and the system data are not cleared from the hard disk drive by any clearing method.

Method 1: RESET button

Pressing the RESET button clears almost all settings of the audio function.

The system becomes the same state when the battery of the vehicle is removed or the yellow lead of

the navigation system is disconnected.

Method 2: [Restore Factory Settings]

Clears some items in the [Map] menu and in the [Settings] menu.

➲“Restoring the Default Setting” ➞ Page 84

Method 3: [Reset] on start-up

Clears the setting values stored in the hard disk drive.

➲“If system errors frequently occur” ➞ Page 161

Method 4: [Clear user information from hard disk] on start-up

Clears all user data (including Music Library) stored in the hard disk drive.

➲“Returning the navigation system completely to the initial state” ➞ Page 161

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 159 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

160

Appendix NAVI/AV

Setting items to be deleted

The items to be deleted vary depending on the reset method. The items listed in the following table

return to the default or factory settings. The items not listed below will be retained.

However, if you carry out [Clear user information from hard disk] all the settings related to the

navigation function including the item not listed below are deleted.

– : The setting will be retained.

✓: The setting content will be cleared and returns to the default or factory settings.

11 Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4

Navigation functions

Map function View mode and scale setting on the

map

––✓✓

Direction of the map ––✓✓

Last cursor position on the map screen ––✓✓

Route Setting Current route ––✓✓

Guidance state of the current route ––✓✓

Vehicle position information ––✓✓

Route conditions –✓✓✓

Destination

Auto full-in function for cities and

streets

––✓✓

Point registered in Address Book –––✓

Sorting order selected in Address

Book ––✓✓

Information

Sorting order selected in Traffic List,

Traffic On Route ––✓✓

Traffic Settings ––✓✓

TMC Provider Selection ––✓✓

Phone Settings (Phone Menu)––✓✓

Telephone Book, Dial Favourite,

Dialed Numbers, Received Calls

(Phone Menu)

––✓✓

Map menu Short-Cut Selection, View Mode ––✓✓

Displayed Info, Overlay POI, Day/

Night Display, AV Guide Mode,

Road Color

–✓✓✓

Settings

Language (Regional settings), Time

(Regional settings), Installation

Angle Setup (Hardware), Defined

Locations, Modify Current Location,

Background Picture Setting

––✓✓

Items other than above –✓✓✓

[Learning Status] ([Hardware]),

[3D Calibration Status] ([Hardware])

––––

Vehicle

Dynamics Right and left gauge type, Adjust Style ––✓✓

Audio Set-

tings All items ✓–––

System Set-

tings Mute Set ✓–✓✓

Clock DISP –✓✓

REC Mode –✓✓

Other item –––

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 160 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

161

AppendixNAVI/AV

If system errors frequently occur

If system errors frequently occur and the power

to the navigation system turns off, an inappropri-

ate content may have been recorded in the mem-

ory or the hard disk drive. In such a case, the

normal operation may be restored by clearing the

setting values stored in the hard disk drive. For

the contents to be cleared, see the list presented

later.

1Start the engine.

After a little time, the start-up screen comes

on for a few seconds.

2Touch and hold the MAP button while the

start-up screen is displayed.

The Clear memory screen appears.

3Touch [Reset].

4Touch [Yes].

The setting values stored in the hard disk drive

return to the default or factory settings. After

that, the navigation opening screen appears.

Returning the navigation system

completely to the initial state

To return the entire navigation system to the

default or factory settings, initialise the naviga-

tion system in the following order:

1Turn the ignition switch off.

2Press the RESET button.

3Start the engine.

After a little time, the start-up screen comes

on for a few seconds.

4Touch and hold the MAP button while the

start-up screen is displayed.

The Clear memory screen appears.

5Touch [Clear user information from hard

disk].

❒This reset operation clears all music data

recorded in the music library. Note that the

cleared data cannot be restored.

6Touch [Yes].

The user area in the hard disk drive is initial-

ised. After that, the navigation system

restarts.

Music Library

(LIBRARY)

Repeat, Random, Scan, and Pause set-

tings

✓–✓✓

Track data –––✓

Play list –––✓

Last playback position –––✓

FM Preset memory ✓–––

AM Preset memory ✓–––

TV Preset memory ✓–––

REAR

SCREEN Rear Screen setting ✓–––

Others Picture Adjust ✓–––

Display Angle ✓–––

11 Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4

Navigation functions

1. Press the RESET button on the hard-

ware.

2. Initialise the user data area on the hard

disk drive.

3. Clear the learned data in the sensor.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 161 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

162

Appendix NAVI/AV

7Press the MENU button and then touch

[Settings].

The setting menu appears.

8Touch [Hardware] and then touch [3D

Calibration Status].

9Touch [Learning Status] and then touch

[Reset All].

Adjusting the Response Posi-

tions of the Touch Panels

(Touch Panel Calibration)

If you feel that the touch keys on the screen devi-

ate from the actual positions that respond to your

touch, adjust the response positions of the touch

panel. There are two adjustment methods: 4-point

adjustment, in which you touch four corners of

the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which

you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen.

❒Make sure to use the supplied stylus for

adjustment, and gently touch the screen. If

you press the touch panel forcefully, the touch

panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp

pointed tool such as a ballpoint pen or a

mechanical pen. Otherwise the screen is

damaged.

Stylus (supplied with navigation system)

1Press the V button.

The Picture Adjust screen appears.

2Press and hold the V button for two sec-

onds or more.

The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen

appears.

3Touch and hold each of the arrows on the

four corners of the screen with the touch

panel adjustment pen.

Hold the pen on the arrow until each one of

the four arrows turns red.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 162 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

163

AppendixNAVI/AV

4Press the V button.

The adjusted position data is saved.

❒Do not turn off the engine while saving the

adjusted position data.

❒Press the MAP button to complete the 4-

point adjustment.

5Press the V button.

The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen

appears.

6Gently touch the centre of the + mark dis-

played on the screen with the touch panel

adjustment pen.

After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-

tion data is saved.

❒Do not turn off the engine while saving the

adjusted position data.

❒Press the V button to return to the previ-

ous adjustment position.

❒To cancel the adjustment, press the MAP

button.

7Press the MAP button.

The adjustment is complete.

❒If touch panel adjustment cannot be per-

formed properly, consult your local Pio-

neer dealer.

Positioning Technology

The navigation system accurately measures your

current location by combining the positioning by

GPS and by Dead Reckoning.

Positioning by GPS

The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a net-

work of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each of the

satellites, which orbit at a height of 68 900 000

feet (21 000 km), continually broadcasts radio sig-

nals giving time and position information. This

ensures that signals from at least three can be

picked up from any open area on the earth’s sur-

face.

The accuracy of the GPS information depends on

how good the reception is. When the signals are

strong and reception is good, GPS can determine

latitude, longitude, and altitude for accurate posi-

tioning in three dimensions. But if signal quality

is poor, only two dimensions, latitude and longi-

tude, can be obtained and positioning errors are

somewhat greater.

Positioning by dead reckoning

The 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation system

also calculates your position. The current loca-

tion is measured by detecting driving distance

with the speed pulse, the turning direction with

the Gyrosensor, and inclination of the road with

the G sensor.

The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculate

changes of altitude, and corrects for discrepan-

cies in the distance travelled caused by driving

along winding roads or up slopes. Also, the navi-

gation system learns the driving conditions and

stores information in the memory; thus, as you

drive more, the precision of the positioning

becomes more accurate.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 163 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

164

Appendix NAVI/AV

The method of positioning changes as follows

depending on whether the speed pulse of your

vehicle is detected or not:

3D hybrid mode

This is active when the speed pulse is detected.

Inclination of a street can be detected.

Simple hybrid mode

When the speed pulse is not detected, position-

ing is performed in this mode. Only horizontal

movement is detected, so it becomes less accu-

rate. Also, when the positioning by GPS is not

available, such as when your vehicle enters a

long tunnel, the discrepancy between your actual

and calculated position may become bigger.

❒The speed pulse data comes from the speed

sensing circuit. The location of this speed

sensing circuit depends on your vehicle

model. In some cases, it is impossible to

make a connection to it, and in such a case

we recommend that the ND-PG1 speed pulse

generator (sold separately) be used.

How do GPS and dead reckon-

ing work together?

For maximum accuracy, your navigation system

continually compares GPS data with your esti-

mated position as calculated from the data of 3D

Hybrid Sensor. However, if only the data from the

3D Hybrid Sensor is available for a long period,

positioning errors are gradually compounded

until the estimated position becomes unreliable.

For this reason, whenever GPS signals are availa-

ble, they are matched with the data of the 3D

Hybrid Sensor and used to correct it for improved

accuracy.

To ensure maximum accuracy, the dead reckon-

ing system learns with experience. By comparing

the position it estimates with your actual position

as obtained using GPS, it can correct for various

types of error, such as tyre wear and the rolling

motion of your vehicle. As you drive, the dead

reckoning system gradually gathers more data,

learns more, and the accuracy of its estimates

gradually increases. So, after you have driven

some distance, you can expect your position as

shown on the map to show fewer errors.

❒If you use chains on your wheels for winter

driving or put on the spare wheel, errors may

suddenly increase because of difference in

wheel diameter. The system detects the fact

that the tyre diameter has changed, and auto-

matically replaces the value for calculating

distance.

❒If the ND-PG1 is used or if your vehicle is oper-

ating in Simple hybrid mode, the distance cal-

culation value cannot be replaced

automatically.

Map matching

As mentioned, the GPS and dead reckoning sys-

tems used by this navigation system are suscepti-

ble to certain errors. Their calculations may, on

occasion, place you in a location on the map

where no road exists. In this situation, the

processing system understands that vehicles

travel only on roads, and can correct your posi-

tion by adjusting it to a nearby road. This is called

map matching.

With map matching

Without map matching

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 164 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

165

AppendixNAVI/AV

Handling Large Errors

Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by com-

bining GPS, Dead Reckoning, and map match-

ing. However, in some situations, these functions

may not work properly, and the error may become

bigger.

When the positioning by GPS is

impossible

• If signals cannot be received from more than

two GPS satellites, GPS positioning does not

take place.

• In some driving conditions, signals from GPS

satellites may not reach your vehicle. In this

case, it is impossible for the system to use GPS

positioning.

• If a car phone or mobile phone is used near the

GPS aerial, GPS reception may be lost tempo-

rarily.

• Do not cover the GPS aerial with spray paint or

car wax, because this may block the reception

of GPS signals. Snow buildup can also

degrade the signals, so keep the aerial clear.

❒If, for any reason, GPS signals cannot be

received, learning and error correction are not

possible. If GPS positioning has been operat-

ing for only a short time, your vehicle’s actual

position and the current location mark on the

map may diverge considerably. Once GPS

reception is restored, accuracy will be recov-

ered.

Vehicles that Cannot Obtain

Speed Pulse Data

❒The speed pulse data comes from the speed

sensing circuit. The location of this speed

sensing circuit depends on your vehicle

model. In some cases, it is impossible to

make a connection to it, and in such a case

we recommend that the ND-PG1 speed pulse

generator (sold separately) be used.

Conditions Likely to Cause

Noticeable Positioning Errors

For various reasons such as the state of the road

you are travelling on and the state of reception of

the GPS signal, the actual position of your vehicle

may differ from the position displayed on the map

screen.

•If you make a slight turn.

In tunnels or enclosed parking garages

Under elevated roads or similar structures

When driving among high buildings

When driving through a dense forest or tall trees

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 165 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

166

Appendix NAVI/AV

• If there is a parallel road.

• If there is another road very nearby, such as in

the case of an elevated motorway.

• If you take a recently opened road that is not on

the map.

• If you drive in zig-zags.

• If the road has connected hairpin bends.

• If there is a loop or similar road configuration.

• If you take a ferry.

• If you are driving on a long, straight road or a

gently curving road.

• If you are on a steep mountain road with many

height changes.

• If you enter or exit a multi-storey car park or

similar using a spiral ramp.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 166 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

167

AppendixNAVI/AV

• If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or simi-

lar structure.

• If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a

rough track or in snow.

• If you put on chains, or change your tyres for

ones with a different size.

• If trees or other obstacles block the GPS sig-

nals for a considerable period.

• If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-stop

manner, as in a traffic jam.

• If you join the road after driving around a large

car park.

• When you go round a roundabout.

• When starting driving immediately after start-

ing the engine.

• If you turn your navigation system on while

driving.

Some types of vehicles may not output a speed

signal while driving at just a few kilometres per

hour. In such a case, the current location of your

vehicle may not be displayed correctly while in a

traffic jam or in a car park.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 167 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

168

Appendix NAVI/AV

Troubleshooting

If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common prob-

lems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehensive, it

should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be found here, con-

tact your dealer or the nearest authorised Pioneer service facility.

Problems in the screen

Symptom Cause Action (See)

Power doesn’t turn on. The naviga-

tion system doesn’t operate.

Leads and connectors are incorrectly

connected.

Confirm once more that all connec-

tions are correct.

The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blow-

ing, then replace the fuse. Be very

sure to install a correct fuse with the

same rate.

Noise and other factors are causing

the internal memory to operate incor-

rectly.

Refer to “Returning the Navigation

System to the Default or Factory Set-

tings” and carry out appropriate

cares. (➞ Page 159)

The hard disk drive can not work

because the temperature is

extremely low or high.

Wait until the temperature inside the

vehicle falls or rises.

When the ignition switch is turned

ON (or turned to ACC), the motor

sounds.

This system confirms whether a disc

is loaded or not.

This is a normal operation.

The navigation does not boot up. The power cable is not wired cor-

rectly.

Turn the system off and the check

the wiring.

The hard disk drive cannot run

because the temperature is too low.

Wait until the inside of the vehicle

warms up.

The hard disk drive is defective. Consult your authorised Pioneer

dealer.

You cannot position your vehicle on

the map or the positioning error is

large.

The quality of signals from the GPS

satellites is poor, causing reduced

positioning accuracy. Such a loss of

signal quality may happen for the fol-

lowing reasons:

• The GPS aerial is in an unsuitable

location.

• Obstacles are blocking signals

from the satellites.

• The position of satellites relative to

your vehicle is bad.

• Signals from the GPS satellites

have been modified to reduce

accuracy. (GPS satellites are oper-

ated by the US Department of

Defense, and the US government

reserves the right to distort posi-

tioning data for military reasons.

This may lead to greater position-

ing errors.)

• If a vehicle phone or mobile phone

is used near the GPS aerial, GPS

reception may be lost temporarily.

• Do not cover the GPS aerial with

spray paint or vehicle wax, because

this may block the reception of

GPS signals. Snow buildup can

also degrade the signals.

Check the GPS signal reception (➞

Page 79) and the position of the GPS

aerial if necessary, or continue driv-

ing until reception improves. Keep

the aerial clear.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 168 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

169

AppendixNAVI/AV

Signals from the vehicle’s speed

pulse are not being picked up prop-

erly.

Check that the cables are properly

connected. If necessary, consult the

dealer that installed the system.

The navigation system may not be

mounted securely in your vehicle.

Check that the navigation system is

securely mounted and, if necessary,

consult the dealer that installed the

system.

Your vehicle is operating in Simple

hybrid mode.

Connect the speed signal input (pink

lead wire) of the power cable cor-

rectly, and reset the 3D Hybrid Sen-

sor memory ([Learning Status]).

The navigation system is installed

with an extreme angle exceeding the

limitation of the installation angle.

Confirm the installation angle. (The

navigation system must be installed

within the allowed installation angle.

For details, refer to “Installation Man-

ual” and [Installation Angle Setup]

on page 81.)

Indication of the position of your vehi-

cle is misaligned after a U-turn or

reversing.

Check whether or not the reverse

gear signal input lead (purple) is con-

nected properly. (The navigation sys-

tem works properly without the lead

connected, but positioning accuracy

will be adversely affected.)

The map continually reorients itself. The travelling direction is always set

to Heading Up.

Touch on the screen and change

the map display.

The daylight display is used even

when the vehicle lights are on.

[Day] is selected to [Day/Night Dis-

play].

Check the [Day/Night Display] set-

ting (➞ Page 43) and make sure

[Automatic] is selected.

The orange/white lead is not con-

nected.

Check the connection.

The display is very dim. The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and

[Automatic] is selected on [Day/

Night Display].

Read about the [Day/Night Dis-

play] setting (➞ Page 43) and, if

desired, select [Day].

The vehicle cabin temperature is

extremely low.

A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is

used, and such displays tend to

darken when cold. Wait for the vehi-

cle to warm up.

Picture quality adjustment of the dis-

play is not correct.

Refer to “Operating the picture

adjustment” (➞ Page 140) to adjust

the picture quality.

Display tilt is not proper setting. Press and hold EJECT button to

adjust the tilt.

No sounds are heard.

The volume level will not rise.

The volume level is low. Adjust the volume level.

The attenuator or mute is on. Turn the attenuator or mute off.

The speaker lead is disconnected. Check the connection.

Volume of beeps and navigation

guidance cannot be adjusted.

You cannot adjust these parameters

with the VOL (8/2) button.

Turn the volume up or down with

[Volume] in the [Settings] menu.

Adjusting the volume of navigation

guidance and beep is not possible.

You cannot adjust them with the

VOL (8/2) button.

Turn the volume up or down accord-

ing to [Volume] (➞ Page 77) in the

Settings menu.

A strange sound is heard when the

vehicle comes close to a certain

place. (E.g. Dog barking)

The sound for the registered location

is set.

Set the sound of that registered loca-

tion to [No Sound]. (➞ Page 58)

Slope is not displayed on the

Vehicle Dynamics screen.

Inclination does not move on the 3D

Calibration screen.

The speed pulse lead is not con-

nected.

Connect the speed pulse lead.

Symptom Cause Action (See)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 169 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

170

Appendix NAVI/AV

No sound, no voice. “Guide Mute” has been set, or sound

volume is reduced to 0.

Adjust the volume of the guidance or

turn “Guide Mute” off.

Refer to “Setting the Volume Related

to the Guidance and Phone” (➞

Page 77).

The estimated time of arrival is differ-

ent from the actual time of arrival.

This phenomenon is normal,

because the estimated time of arrival

is affected by various factors such as

traffic jams or shortcuts.

The estimated time of arrival is an

ideal value calculated based on the

value set for [Average Speed] and

the actual driving speed. The esti-

mated time of arrival is only a refer-

ence value, and does not guarantee

arrival at that time.

When the screen is frozen...

Park your vehicle at a safe place, and cut off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc off”. Then

start the engine again, and turn the power to the navigation system back on. If this does not solve the

problem, press the RESET button on the navigation system.

Symptom Cause Action (See)

CD or DVD playback is not possible. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.

The disc is dirty. Clean disc.

The disc is cracked or otherwise

damaged.

Insert a normal, round disc.

The files on the CD are an irregular

file format.

Check the file format. (Refer to

“Handing and care of the disc” on

the Hardware Manual.)

The CD format cannot be played

back.

Replace disc. (Refer to “Handing and

care of the disc” on the Hardware

Manual.)

The loaded disc is a type this system

cannot play.

Check what type the disc is. (➞ Hard-

ware Manual)

No picture. The handbrake lead is not connected

or applied.

Connect a handbrake lead correctly,

and apply the handbrake.

Handbrake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in the safe place

and apply the handbrake.

➲Handbrake interlock ➞ Page 14

[AV Input] setting is incorrect. Please read the following page and

set the setting correctly.

➞ Page 136

Audio skipping. The navigation system is not firmly

secured.

Secure the navigation system firmly.

Failure hard disk drive. Consult your Pioneer dealer.

“Rear display” picture disappears. The setting for [REAR SCREEN] is

incorrect.

Please read the following page and

set the rear screen setting correctly.

➞ Page 139

There was a problem with the “Rear

display” or a faulty wiring connec-

tion, for example.

Check the “Rear display” and its con-

nection.

When the gearstick is in [R], displays

rear view camera images. (When

[MIRROR] is selected in REAR

SCREEN menu.)

Select [DVD] or [AV] in REAR

SCREEN menu. When you move the

gearstick other than [R] position, the

screen will be returned to the previ-

ous display.

[DVD-V Setup] is carried out You can not display the video image

to “Rear display” during [DVD-V

Setup] menu.

Symptom Cause Action (See)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 170 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

171

AppendixNAVI/AV

The image on the “Rear Display” is in

black and white, or not displayed cor-

rectly.

The Rear Display output from the

navigation system is switched

between the NTSC system and the

PAL system according to the image.

For some images, the image format

may not match that of the “Rear Dis-

play”.

• Use a product (e.g. AVD-W1100V)

that has the NTSC/PAL auto switch

function for the “Rear Display” as

well.

• Manually switch between NTSC

and PAL for “Rear Display”.

Nothing is displayed and the touch

panel keys cannot use.

The setting for the rear view camera

is incorrect.

Connect a rear view camera cor-

rectly.

The gearstick was placed in [R] when

the rear view camera was not con-

nected.

Press the AV button to return to the

source display and then select the

correct polarity setting for Camera

Input.

➲About Camera Input setting ➞

Page 136

The back light of the LCD panel is

turned off.

Press the V button to turn on the

back light.

Touch panel key is not respond or dif-

ferent key is respond.

Touch keys deviate from the actual

positions that respond to your touch

for some reason.

Perform the touch panel calibration.

“Adjusting the Response Positions of

the Touch Panels (Touch Panel Cali-

bration)” ➞ Page 162

CD recording is not possible. The disc cannot record, such as MP3

disc, DVD-video, is inserted.

The disc other than normal music CD

can not be recorded.

CD recording doesn’t stop though

the record progress indicator shows

100%.

Music Library recording will be can-

celled after playback of the current

track is finished. (The recording

mode stops at the interval of the

tracks.)

Wait until the current track is ended

or change the source manually.

No sounds are heard.

The volume level will not rise.

Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.

The system is performing still, slow

motion or frame-by-frame playback

with DVD-video.

There is no sound during still, slow

motion or frame-by-frame playback

with DVD-video.

The system is performing still, fast

rewind or forward during the MP3

disc playback.

In the case of MP3, there is no sound

on fast rewind or forward.

“dts” is selected for the DVD-Video

disc sound track.

Switch to a non “dts” sound track.

The icon is displayed, and opera-

tion is not possible.

The operation is not compatible with

the DVD’s configuration.

This operation is not possible. (For

example, the DVD playing does not

feature that angle, audio system,

subtitle language, etc.)

The picture stops (pauses) and the

unit cannot be operated.

Reading of data has become impos-

sible during DVD playback.

After touching ( once, start playback

once more.

The picture is stretched, the aspect is

incorrect.

The aspect setting is incorrect for the

display.

Select the appropriate setting for that

image.

➲“Changing the wide screen

mode” ➞ Page 135

➲“Setting the aspect ratio” ➞

Page 134

A parental lock message is displayed

and DVD playback is not possible.

Parental lock is on. Turn parental lock off or change the

level (➞ Page 135).

Parental lock for DVD playback can-

not be cancelled.

The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number. (➞

Page 135).

Playback is not with the audio lan-

guage and subtitle language settings

selected in [DVD-V Setup].

The DVD playing does not feature

dialogue or subtitles in the language

selected in [DVD-V Setup].

Switching to a selected language is

not possible if the language selected

in [DVD-V Setup] is not recorded

on the disc.

Symptom Cause Action (See)

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 171 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

172

Appendix NAVI/AV

Messages and How to React to Them

Messages for navigation functions

The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system.

❒There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a

case, follow the instructions given on the display.

Dialing is not possible because the

touch keys for dialing is inactive.

Your phone is out of range for serv-

ice.

Retry after entering within range for

service.

The connection between mobile

phone and the Bluetooth unit (navi-

gation system) cannot be established

now.

Perform the connection process.

The mobile phone is not registered to

the navigation syetem yet.

To use the mobile phone featuring

the Bluetooth wireless technology

with this navigation system, the reg-

istration process is necessary.

Symptom Cause Action (See)

Message When What to do

Irregular speed pulse signal

detected. Please power off the sys-

tem and check the installation. Then,

please re-boot the system and press

“OK”.

If the navigation system does not

receive the vehicle speed pulse.

Consult your Pioneer dealer.

Speed pulse not connected. Calibra-

tion will start without speed pulse.

Accuracy is not fully ensured without

speed pulse.

The speed signal input (pink lead

wire) of the power cable is not con-

nected.

To operate with 3D hybrid mode, con-

nect the speed signal input (pink

lead wire) of the power cable cor-

rectly.

Although it can be operated with

Simple hybrid mode without con-

necting the speed signal input, the

precision of the positioning will be

less accurate.

Vibration detected. Please power off

the system and check the installa-

tion. Then, please re-boot the system

and press “OK”.

The navigation unit is installed in a

place where it may be affected by a

large vibration.

Re-install the navigation unit in a

place where the unit will not be

affected by vibration.

Direction of G sensor is not correct.

Please power off the system and

check the installation. Then, please

re-boot the system and press “OK”.

Direction of G sensor is set incor-

rectly.

See the Installation Manual and set

the direction of the navigation unit

correctly.

Gyro Sensor is not working properly.

Please consult your dealer or Pioneer

service centre.

Abnormal output of Gyrosensor is

detected.

Note down the error code shown on

the screen; turn off the power, and

then contact your nearest Pioneer

service facility.

Positioning is not possible due to the

hardware. Please contact your dealer

or Pioneer service centre.

The location display is not possible

due to failure of hardware.

Consult your dealer.

GPS antenna problem detected.

Please contact your dealer or Pioneer

service centre.

The location display is not possible

due to failure of GPS aerial.

Consult your dealer.

This function is currently unavailable. The screen cannot be displayed with

Vehicle Dynamics Display.

Because the sensor has not been

taught so the sensor information

cannot be acquired.

If the sensor learning status reaches

the Sensor Initialising status or

more, the system is ready to be used.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 172 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

173

AppendixNAVI/AV

The vertical installation angle is

changed. Gyro Sensor calibration is

re-initialized.

If the mounting angle of the naviga-

tion unit has been changed.

The system initialises the sensor in

order to operate it with the maximum

performance and automatically

starts re-learning.

Excess vertical installation angle

detected. Please install the naviga-

tion unit correctly.

The navigation system is installed

with an extreme angle exceeding the

limitation of the installation angle.

Confirm the installation angle. (The

navigation system must be installed

within the allowed installation angle.

For details, refer to Installation Man-

ual.)

Route calculation was not possible. Route calculation has failed because

of malfunction of map data, software,

hardware.

• Change the destination.

• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if

this message persists.

Route calculation not possible

because destination is too far.

If the destination is too far. • Set a destination closer to the start-

ing point.

• Set one or more waypoints.

Route calculation not possible

because destination is too close.

The destination or waypoint(s) are

too close.

Set a destination and waypoint(s) far-

ther from the starting point.

Route calculation not possible due to

traffic regulations.

• The destination or waypoint(s) are

in a Control Traffic Zone (CTR) and

the route calculation is hampered.

• Your vehicle is currently in a Con-

trol Traffic Zone (CTR) and the

route calculation is hampered.

• Set a destination and waypoint(s)

outside the CTR if you know where

the restricted area is.

• Try the destination or waypoint(s)

away from the currently set points

to some extent.

• Drive your vehicle to an unre-

stricted area and reset the destina-

tion and waypoint(s).

Route calculation not possible

because navigation cannot be pro-

vided around destination or starting

point.

The destination, waypoint(s), or start-

ing point are in an area where no

road exists (e.g. a mountain) and the

route calculation is impossible.

• Set a destination and waypoint(s)

on roads.

• Reset the destination after you

drive the vehicle to any road.

Route to destination cannot be cal-

culated.

The destination or waypoint(s) are in

an isolated island, etc. without a ferry

and the route calculation is impossi-

ble. If there is no road connect to

your starting point or destination,

this message will appear.

Change the destination.

• Ferry could not be avoided.

• Toll roads could not be avoided.

• Motorway could not be avoided.

• Ferry, toll roads and motorways

could not be avoided.

• Ferry and toll roads could not be

avoided.

• Toll roads and motorways could not

be avoided.

• Ferry and motorway could not be

avoided.

In case a ferry route, toll roads or

motorways are included in the route

to the destination or waypoints even

though a route is set to avoid them.

You can recognise these condition by

icon.

➲“Checking and modifying the

route” ➞ Page 24

If the current route is not desired, set

destination or waypoints that do not

pass through a ferry route, toll roads

or motorways.

This area does not contain any POI’s

of the selected type.

Facilities of the selected category do

not exist in the surrounding areas.

Use another search method or move

to another location and perform the

[Vicinity Search] again.

Failed to make the route profile. In rarely case the route calculation

error may occur.

•Retry.

• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if

this message persists.

There is no Traffic List. There is no available traffic informa-

tion now.

Move to the location where you can

receive the RDS-TMC information,

and then try the operation again.

“Service provider name” is currently

unavailable.

The system cannot tune to the

selected provider for some reason.

• Select another provider.

• Move to the location where you can

receive the selected provider, and

then try the operation again.

Message When What to do

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 173 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

174

Appendix NAVI/AV

There are currently no TMC providers

available.

The system cannot tune to the

selected provider for some reason

and cannot found any other provid-

ers.

Move to the location where you can

receive another RDS-TMC provider,

and then try the operation again.

There is no pictures folder. Please

create /Pictures/ folder and store

JPEG files in that Folder.

Cannot load the image because the

Pictures folder is not found in the

inserted disc.

Use the appropriate data after read-

ing “Limitations for import the pic-

ture” on page 83.

“Service provider name” is currently

unavailable.

The system cannot tune to the

selected provider for some reason.

• Select another provider.

• Move to the location where you can

receive the selected provider, and

then try the operation again.

Data Read error. Failed to read the data because the

CD-R is damaged or dirty. Or, the

pick-up lens of the DVD drive is dirty.

Try re-reading the data by inserting a

clean CD-R.

Clean the pick-up lens with a com-

mercially available cleaning kit for

DVD, then try to reading again.

The Pictures folder exists on the CD-

R but no data in JPEG format exists.

Use the appropriate data after read-

ing “Limitations for import the pic-

ture” on page 83.

JPEG file is corrupt. The data is damaged or an attempt

was made to set a JPEG image, that

is out of specifications, as the back-

ground picture.

Use the appropriate data after read-

ing “Limitations for import the pic-

ture” on page 83.

Connection failed. The mobile phone’s Bluetooth wire-

less technology is turned off.

Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth

wireless technology on.

The mobile phone is pared (con-

nected) with another device.

Cancel the paring (connection) and

retry.

Rejection by the mobile phone has

received.

Operate target phone and accept the

connection request from the naviga-

tion system. (Furthermore, check the

setting related connection on your

mobile phone.)

The target mobile phone can not be

found.

Check whether your mobile phone is

turned off or not, whether the dis-

tance to your mobile phone is too far

or not.

Registration step has been success-

ful but connection is fail for some

reason.

Retry the registration and if a con-

nection still cannot be established,

try connecting using your mobile

phone.

Registration failed. The mobile phone’s Bluetooth wire-

less technology is turned off during

the registration step.

Keep turning the target phone’s

Bluetooth wireless technology on

during the registration.

Rejection by the mobile phone has

received.

Operate target phone and accept the

registration request from the naviga-

tion system. (Furthermore, check the

setting related connection on your

mobile phone.

Registration step is fail for some rea-

son.

Retry the registration and if a regis-

tration still cannot be failed, try regis-

tering using your mobile phone.

Automatic connection in progress.

Please try again later.

If you try to perform another opera-

tion during automatic connection by

the system.

• Wait for a while and retry.

• Establish that connection tempo-

rarily and retry that later.

Automatic connection in progress.

Please try manually later.

If you try to connect another phone

during automatic connection by the

system.

Establish that connection temporar-

ily and retry that later.

Message When What to do

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 174 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

175

AppendixNAVI/AV

Could not find any available phone. No available phone is exist on the

surroundings when the system

search the mobile phone featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology for

registration.

• Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth

wireless technology on.

• Check whether your mobile phone

is turned off or not, whether the dis-

tance to your mobile phone is too

far or not.

Bluetooth unit error. It is not possible

to find any cell phones.

If the Bluetooth unit is disconnected

from this navigation system or Blue-

tooth unit carry out another process-

ing when the system search the

mobile phone featuring Bluetooth

wireless technology for registration.

• Check the connection and retry.

• Establish that connection tempo-

rarily and retry that later.

Bluetooth unit error. The device

name could not be set.

If the Bluetooth unit is disconnected

from this navigation system or Blue-

tooth unit carry out another process-

ing when you change the device

name.

• Check the connection and retry.

• Establish that connection tempo-

rarily and retry that later.

Registration is not available. If you try to perform another opera-

tion immediately after failure the con-

nection.

Wait for a while and retry.

Reading failed. • If you transferred the data from

your mobile phone by a format can

not be received with navigation sys-

tem.

• Disconnection has been made dur-

ing transfer for some reason.

• Select just a suitable item, format

and then retry.

• Connect your mobile phone again

and retry.

Calibration failed.

Please refer to the owner’s manual.

The touch panel calibration has not

been carried out with appropriate

steps.

Please read the instruction of touch

panel calibration and retry.

➞ Page 162

The HDD is not connected. Failure of the built-in hard disk drive

occur, such as internal electrical

problem or file system error, etc.

Consult your dealer.

Cannot use HDD. Failure of the built-in hard disk drive

occur, such as internal electrical

problem or file system error, etc.

Consult your dealer.

There is no applicable programme. Failure of the built-in hard disk drive

occur, such as internal electrical

problem or file system error, etc.

Consult your dealer.

The HDD cannot be operated due to

excessive heat. Please turn off power

immediately.

Hard disk drive can not run due to

high temperature.

Park your vehicle to safe place, turn

the ignition switch off and wait until

the temperature inside the vehicle

drops.

Message When What to do

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 175 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

176

Appendix NAVI/AV

Messages for Audio functions

When problems occur in the audio source, a message may appears on the display. Refer to the table

below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists, contact

your dealer or your nearest PIONEER Service Centre.

Built-in DVD drive

Hard disk drive (Music Library)

Message When What to do

Unreadable disc. If you try to use a disc which is incom-

patible with this system.

Insert a suitable disc.

If you insert a disc upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.

If the disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

If the disc is cracked or otherwise dam-

aged.

Insert a normal, round disc.

Mechanical failure of DVD drive occur. Consult your Pioneer dealer.

Playback error.

Please remove the disc.

Electrical or mechanical error is occur. Press the RESET button. (“Hardware

manual” after reading page 159 in this

manual.)

Region code error The disc does not have the same region

number as the navigation system.

Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing

the correct region number.

Playback error due to irregu-

lar temperature. Please

remove the disc.

The temperature of built-in DVD drive is

out of the operating limits.

Park your vehicle to safe place, turn the

ignition switch off and wait until the

built-in DVD drive’s temperature returns

to within normal operating limits.

ATTENTION!

Viewing of front seat video

source while driving is strictly

prohibited.

Handbrake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in the safe place and

apply the handbrake.

➲Handbrake interlock ➞ Page 14

Search error If the title number, chapter number,

time, 10 key command, which you enter

in [10Key Search] are not exist. (This

message will appear when DVD drive

can not accept that command.)

Enter the available numbers or 10 key

command or use another search

method.

Message When What to do

This CD cannot be recorded If you insert a CD which prohibit second-

generation copies or duplicate.

Use another CD and retry.

•Recording error.

Switching to CD playback

mode

•Recording error.

Recording is stopped

• The recording was unsta-

ble. Restart the recording

from the beginning of the

track.

If recording can not be carried out with

skipping certain part of the disc continu-

ously because the disc is dirty,

scratched, otherwise damaged, the pick-

up lens of the DVD drive is dirty, or the

extreme vibration occur continuously.

• Clean the disc and retry.

• Clean the pick-up lens with a commer-

cially available cleaning kit for DVD, then

retry.

• Retry in vibration-free condition.

Exceeded playlist maxi-

mum. No more playlists can

be recorded.

If you try to record a new CD but the

playlists are maximum number. (The

album playlist can be stores up to 400.)

Delete some playlist and retry.

Playback error. Music

Library cannot be played

The music library component is abnor-

mal.

Consult your dealer.

MyMix cannot store more

than 99 tracks.

If you try to add the tracks but the MyMix

playlists are maximum number. (The

MyMix playlist can store the tracks up to

99.)

Delete some tracks and retry.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 176 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

177

AppendixNAVI/AV

Other sources

This track cannot be added

to MyMix

The music library component is abnor-

mal.

Consult your dealer.

Name cannot be used for

voice recognition. Try again.

In case some invalid character have

been entered and the system can not

convert it appropriate pronunciation.

Enter the different characters so that the

system can pronounce that.

Single recording mode will

only record the first track of

Record the tracks other than the first

track of CD when the recording mode is

[Single].

When you set [Single] in [REC Mode], the

system only can record the first track of

CD. Set [Auto] or [Manual] in [REC

Mode] and retry. (➞ Page 138)

HDD is full. This CD cannot

be recorded

There is no free space for recording in

the hard disk drive.

Delete some tracks or playlist and try again

if you want to record that CD.

Unable to select appropriate

Track info due to multiple

entries in the database.

Some corresponded data is found in

Gracenote® Database, the system can-

not select one to append a title.

Enter the title manually, or try to retrieve

the title by touching [Update title].

All artist names in the playl-

ist have been deleted

because no character has

been entered. Do you want

to proceed?

If you try to delete the artist name

entirely. The artist will not be displayed

in the artist group and artist name on

the information plate also will not be dis-

played.

If you enter the artist name again, the artist

name appears.

Message When What to do

Search failed. iPod is preparing playback.

Therefore, the operation is invalid now.

Wait until [Ready] disappear and try the

operation.

Message When What to do

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 177 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

178

Appendix NAVI/AV

When the hard disk drive is dis-

connected

If there is no hard disk drive because of the repair

or service, you can operate Radio source only

without the hard disk drive.

Only following operation is available. Other func-

tions can not operate.

• Only FM, AM source can operate. (Preset sta-

tion select and can not operate.)

• If the selected source before ejecting the hard

disk drive is [AV]. [AV input] source is availa-

ble on “Rear display”. (If the selected source is

[DVD], nothing is output to “Rear display”. If

the selected source is [MIRROR], Same

image as “Front display” is output to “Rear dis-

play”.)

• Rear view camera is available only when the

vehicle is backing up. ([Rear View] is not

available.)

Route Setting Information

Route search specifications

Your navigation system sets a route to your desti-

nation by applying certain built-in rules to the

map data. This section provides some useful

information about how a route is set.

• When a route is calculated, the route and

voice guidance for the route is automati-

cally set. Also, for day or time traffic regu-

lations, only information about traffic

regulations at the time when the route was

calculated is shown. One-way streets and

street closures may not be taken into con-

sideration. For example, if a street is open

during the morning only, but you arrive

later, it would be against the traffic regula-

tions so you cannot drive along the set

route. When driving, please follow the

actual traffic signs. Also, the system may

not know some traffic regulations.

• The calculated route is one example of the

route to your destination decided by the navi-

gation system whilst taking the type of streets

or traffic regulations into account. It is not nec-

essarily an optimum route. (In some cases, you

may not be able to set the streets you want to

pass. If you need to pass a certain street, set

the waypoint on that street.)

• The route set by your navigation system may

not use the streets known to local drivers, such

as small streets or special roads.

• Some route options may become the same

route. If waypoints are set, only one route is

calculated.

• If the destination is too far, there may be

instances where the route cannot be set. (If

you want to set a long-distance route going

across several areas, set waypoints along the

way.)

• During voice guidance, turns and intersections

from the motorway are announced. However, if

you pass intersections, turns, and other guide

points in rapid succession, some may not be

announced.

• It is possible that guidance may direct you off a

motorway and then back on again.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 178 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

179

AppendixNAVI/AV

• In some cases, the route may require you to

travel in the opposite direction to your current

heading. In such cases, you are instructed to

turn around, so please turn around safely by

following the actual traffic rules.

• In some cases, guidance may direct you past

your destination and then indicate a U-turn to

get back to it.

• In some cases, a route may begin on the oppo-

site side of a railway or river from your actual

current location. If this happens, drive towards

your destination for a while, and try route cal-

culation again.

• When there is a traffic jam or closure ahead, if

driving through the traffic jam or closure is bet-

ter than taking the detour, a detour route may

not appear.

• There may be instances when the starting

point and the destination point are not on the

highlighted route.

• The number of roundabout exits displayed on

the screen may differ from the actual number

of roads.

Auto Reroute

• Auto Reroute is used when you deviate more

than 30m from the route.

• The Auto Reroute function does not work in the

following cases:

– when your vehicle is not on a street

– when you are too close to your destination

– when your vehicle is on a ferry

– when driving on a road inside a facility

– when driving on a roundabout

– when driving on the routes are described in

“Roads not used in calculations”

• The system assumes the driver deviated either

intentionally or inadvertently from the route

and searches for another route (intelligent

rerouting). Depending on the situation, the sys-

tem may search a new route that does not

return to the original one.

Route highlighting

• Once set, the route is highlighted in bright

green or light blue on the map.

• The immediate vicinity of your starting point

and destination may not be highlighted, and

neither will areas with particularly complex

road layouts. Consequently, the route may

appear to be cut off on the display, but voice

guidance will continue.

Roads not used in calculations

Even though displayed on screen, the following

roads are not included in route calculations.

• Walkway

• Public vehicle only

• Non access road

➲“Browsing the Map Colour Explanation” ➞

Page 42

Tracking

• Your navigation system marks your course on

the map in certain increments. This is called

tracking. It is handy when you want to check a

route travelled without guidance or if returning

along a complex route.

• A maximum of about 250 km (155 miles) is

marked and, as you travel beyond this limit,

tracking marks are erased in order from the

most distant. Tracking display shows about

160 km (100 miles) tracking of your vehicle

with white dots.

➲Tracking can also be set for automatic erasing

whenever the navigation system is switched

off ➞ Page 39

Displaying POI

Points of Interest (POI) that can be displayed on

the enlarged map of the intersection or [Driver’s

View] (left screen) are only the special Points of

Interest (POI) that contain the position informa-

tion. Not all of Points of Interests (POI) are dis-

played.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 179 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

180

Appendix NAVI/AV

Glossary

This glossary explains some of the terms used in

the manual.

3D Hybrid sensor

The built-in sensor which enables the system to estimate

your vehicle’s position. A learning function increases its

accuracy and its learning data can be stored in memory.

Address Book

A list of previously searched destinations, waypoints and

locations registered manually.

Aspect ratio

This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. A regular

display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays

have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture

for exceptional presence and atmosphere.

Bit rate

This expresses data volume per second, or bps units

(bits per second). The higher the rate, the more informa-

tion is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same

encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the

better the sound.

Chapter

DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are

numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book.

With DVD-Video discs featuring chapters, you can

quickly find a desired scene with chapter search.

Current location

The present location of your vehicle; your current loca-

tion is shown on the map by a red triangle mark.

Default setting

A factory setting which applies when you first switch on

the system; you can change default settings to suit your

own needs in the menu.

Destination

A location you choose as the end point of your journey.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to

5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby

Digital surround sound system used in theatres.

DTS

This stands for Digital Theatre Systems. DTS is a sur-

round system delivering multi-channel audio from up to

6 independent channels.

Favourite location

A frequently visited location (such as your workplace or

a relative’s home) that you can register to allow easy

routing.

GPS

Global Positioning System. A network of satellites that

provides navigation signals for a variety of purposes.

Gracenote® Music recognition service

Music recognition technology and related data are pro-

vided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard

in music recognition technology and related content

delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.

Guidance mode

The mode in which guidance is given as you drive to your

destination; the system automatically switches to this

mode as soon as a route has been set.

Guidance point

These are important landmarks along your route, gener-

ally intersections. The next guidance point along your

route is indicated on the map by the yellow flag icon.

Home location

Your registered home location.

ID3 tag

This is a method of embedding track-related information

in a MP3 file. This embedded information can include

the track title, the artist’s name, the album title, the

music genre, the year of production, comments and

other data. The contents can be freely edited using soft-

ware with ID3 Tag editing functions. Although the tags

are restricted to the number of characters, the informa-

tion can be viewed when the track is played back.

ISO9660 format

This is the international standard for the format logic of

CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there

are regulations for the following two levels.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to

8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-

byte numerals and the “_” sign, with a file-extension of

three characters).

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 180 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

181

AppendixNAVI/AV

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 characters (including

the separation mark “.” and a file extension). Each folder

contains less than 8 hierarchies.

Extended formats

Joliet:

File names can have up to 64 characters.

Romeo:

File names can have up to 128 characters.

Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation

This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is

the signal recording system used for music CDs and

DVDs. Generally, DVDs are recorded with higher sam-

pling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs

can provide higher sound quality.

m3u

Playlists created using the “WINAMP” software

have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

A list of options shown on the display; choices are

selected touching the display.

MP3

MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio com-

pression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the

ISO (International Standards Organisation). MP3 is able

to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a

conventional disc.

MPEG

This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an

international “Video image” compression standard.

Some DVDs feature digital audio compressed and

recorded using this system.

Multi-angle

With regular TV programmes, although multiple cam-

eras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only

images from one camera at a time are transmitted to

your TV. Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple

angles, letting you choose your viewing angle as desired.

Multi-audio (Multilingual dialogue)

Some DVDs feature dialogue recorded in multiple lan-

guages. Dialogue in up to 8 languages can be recorded

on a single disc, letting you choose as desired.

Multi-session

Multi-session is a recording method that allows addi-

tional data to be recorded later. When recording data on

a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from begin-

ning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-

session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions

in one disc.

Multi-subtitle

Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be recorded on a sin-

gle DVD, letting you choose as desired.

Optical digital output

By transmitting audio signals in a digital signal format,

the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of

transmission is minimized. An optical digital output is

designed to transmit digital signals optically.

Packet write

This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R,

etc. at the time required for a file, just as is done with

files on floppy or hard discs.

Parental lock

Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-oriented

scenes feature parental lock which prevents children

from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you

set the unit’s parental lock level, playback of scenes

inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these

scenes will be skipped.

Point of Interest (POI)

Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations stored in

the data, such as railway stations, shops, restaurants,

and amusement parks.

Region number

DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indi-

cating the area in which they were purchased. Playback

of a DVD is not possible unless it features the same

region number as the DVD player. The navigation sys-

tem’s region number is displayed on the bottom of the

display unit.

Route setting

The process of determining the ideal route to a specific

location; route setting is done automatically by the sys-

tem when you specify a destination.

Set route

The route marked out by the system to your destination.

It is highlighted in bright green on the map.

Title

DVD-Video discs have high data capacity, enabling

recording of multiple movies on a single disc. If, for

example, one disc contains three separate movies, they

are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you

enjoy the convenience of title search and other func-

tions.

Tracking

Marks on the map indicating the route you have trav-

elled.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 181 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

182

Appendix NAVI/AV

TV system (NTSC, PAL, SECAM)

Different areas of the world use different TV systems.

North America uses NTSC, Europe uses PAL and

SECAM, and South America uses PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL

and NTSC.

Almost all are incompatible with each other. To display

the video image, such as TV or DVD-video correctly, you

may need to coordinate your system at the same TV sys-

tem or use a multisystem equipment.

VBR

VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking

CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexi-

bly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio

compression, it is possible to achieve compression prior-

ity sound quality.

Voice guidance

The giving of directions by a recorded voice while in

guidance mode.

Voice recognition

The technology that allows the system to understand the

driver’s voice commands.

Way Point

A location that you choose to visit before your destina-

tion; a journey can be built up from multiple waypoints

and the destination.

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 182 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

183

AppendixNAVI/AV

Display Information

Navigation menu

Destination menu

Information menu

P.20

P.50, 53

P.49, 53

P.48

P.45

P.47

P.26

P.25

P.49, 53

P.50, 59

P.62 P.61 P.64 P.64

P.70 P.74 P.71, 73 P.73 P.71, 75

P.71, 75 P.68

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 183 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

184

Appendix NAVI/AV

Map menu

P.41

P.43

P.41

P.43

P.42

P.43

P.39

P.40

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 184 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

185

AppendixNAVI/AV

Setting menu

P.79 P.80 P.81 P.81 P.81

P.77

P.78

P.79

P.77

P.84 P.84

P.53

P.84

P.82

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 185 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

186

Appendix NAVI/AV

Shortcut menu

❒The shortcuts displayed on screen can be changed. The shortcuts described here are those that can

be selected with the system as default setting.

❒Items marked with an asterisk (*) can not be removed from the shortcut menu.

➲Changing a shortcut ➞ Page 41

: Registration

P. 48

: Vicinity Search

P. 41

: Overlay POI

P. 77

: Volume

: Dial Favourite 1 to 5

: Phone book

: Whole Route Overview

: Traffic On Route

P. 27

Learning Route

Avoid Motorway

Avoid Ferry

P. 26

Avoid Toll Road

P. 26

Route Condition

: Destination* P. 37

: Route Options*

: Traffic List

: Day/Night Display

P. 54

P. 71, 74

P. 71, 73

P. 27

P. 62

P. 61

P. 43

Shortcut menu

P. 26

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 186 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

187

AppendixNAVI/AV

Menu in the Audio Screen

Audio Settings menu

System Settings menu (Page 1)

System Settings menu (Page 2)

P.129

P.132

P.131

P.133

P.131 P.132 P.132

P.134

P.137

P.135

P.137

P.136

P.138

P.136

P.138

P.137

P.138 P.138 P.138 P.139 P.139

P.139

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 187 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

188

Appendix NAVI/AV

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 188 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 1 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU, TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.

TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium

TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936

TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia

TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada

TEL: 1-877-283-5901

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.

Blvd. Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso

Col. Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000

TEL: 55-9178-4270

Published by Pioneer Corporation.

Printed in Belgium

<CRB2188-A> EW

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN

MAN-HD1BT-SOFTW-EN.book Page 2 Thursday, April 20, 2006 3:47 PM

Pioneer Avic Hd1 Bt Operation Manual

AVIC HD1 BT - Operation Manual AVIC-HD1BT_UM_EN Free User Guide for Pioneer GPS, Manual - page2

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation